MODEL NC800C

DLP Cinema® Projector

SERVICE MANUAL PART No. 3N9911131

Better Service
Better Reputation
Better Profit

Copyright 1. Contens 2. Safety precautions

3. Users manual 4. Troubleshooting 5. Serviceman mode
6. Method of firmware upgrading
7. Adjustments and inspecitions attributable to the replacement of electrical and optical parts
8. Circuit discription 9. Assembly diagram 10. Packaging
11. Replacement part list 12. Connection diagrams 13. Block diagrams
14. Lamp blub replacement procedures and precautions Back cover

SAFETY CAUTION:
Before servicing this chassis, it is important that the service
technician read and follow the “Safety Precautions” and “Product
Safety Notice” in this Service Manual.

WARNING:
SHOCK HAZARD - Use an isolation transformer when servicing.
(1) Copyright (C) NEC Viewtechnology, Ltd.
All Rights Reserved.
This document contains confidential information.
Unauthorized copying, duplication, distribution, or
republication is strictly prohibited.

(2) The contents of this manual are subject to change

without prior notice.
 CONTENTS

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS .................................................................................................. 2-1

USERS MANUAL .............................................................................................................. E-1

TROUBLESHOOTING ....................................................................................................... 4-1

SERVICEMAN MODE ....................................................................................................... 5-1

Title Setup ......................................................................................................................................................5-1
Configuration ................................................................................................................................................ 5-2
Ext. MMS Link ................................................................................................................................................5-2
Panel Key Lock ..............................................................................................................................................5-2
GPIO Port .......................................................................................................................................................5-3
FactoryDefault ...............................................................................................................................................5-3
Installation .....................................................................................................................................................5-4
Lens Center ...................................................................................................................................................5-4
MMS Select ....................................................................................................................................................5-5
Baudrate .........................................................................................................................................................5-6
Date/Time .......................................................................................................................................................5-6
Bulb Warning ................................................................................................................................................ 5-7
Security Key ..................................................................................................................................................5-7
Memory ..........................................................................................................................................................5-8

METHOD OF FIRMWARE UPGRADING .......................................................................... 6-1

1. Environmental setup (common) .............................................................................................................6-1
2. Error Status check .................................................................................................................................. 6-1
3. Version check (Interface, Processor, EFIB, Formatter) ........................................................................6-2
4. Update (Interface, Processor) ................................................................................................................ 6-3
5. Formatter Update (Formatter) ................................................................................................................ 6-4
6. EFIB Update (EFIB) ..................................................................................................................................6-5
7. Cinema Block resetting (Interface, Processor, EFIB, Formatter) ........................................................6-6
8. NC_data_v**&M10I.MCGD data writing (Interface Board) ....................................................................6-7
9. Common setup .........................................................................................................................................6-9
9-1. Lamp Off Mode (Remote Controller operation) .............................................................................6-9
9-2. DLP Cinema Firmware Installation Program ..................................................................................6-10
9-3. DLP Cinema Control Program .........................................................................................................6-11

ADJUSTMENTS AND INSPECTIONS ATTRIBUTABLE TO THE REPLACEMENT

OF ELECTRICAL AND OPTICAL PARTS ........................................................................ 7-1
Parts Replacement Work .........................................................................................................................7-1
Software Check and Update Flow ......................................................................................................... 7-5
Interface board .........................................................................................................................................7-7
Processor board ......................................................................................................................................7-15
EFIB board ................................................................................................................................................7-19
Prism ASSY ..............................................................................................................................................7-24
Flat cable ..................................................................................................................................................7-30
CPU board ................................................................................................................................................7-32
PJDIV board ..............................................................................................................................................7-35
HUB ...........................................................................................................................................................7-39
PJKEY board ............................................................................................................................................7-41
GPSU (Main PS) board ............................................................................................................................7-45
Standby PS ...............................................................................................................................................7-47
Lens mount ...............................................................................................................................................7-50

Circuit Description ........................................................................................................... 8-1

CPU PWB ..................................................................................................................................................8-1
GPIO PWB ................................................................................................................................................ 8-8
ETHER Board ...........................................................................................................................................8-11
PJKEY PWB ..............................................................................................................................................8-12
MOTOR PWB ............................................................................................................................................8-13
1-1
 CONTENTS

EFIB PWB ................................................................................................................................................ 8-14

MOTHER Board ....................................................................................................................................... 8-15
FMB PWB ..................................................................................................................................................8-16
Interface PWB ...........................................................................................................................................8-17
PROCESSOR Board ................................................................................................................................ 8-18
DIV Board ..................................................................................................................................................8-19
SENSOR Board ....................................................................................................................................... 8-20
FAN Board ................................................................................................................................................8-21
Lamp TIMMER Board ...............................................................................................................................8-22
Power Supply ...........................................................................................................................................8-23

ASSEMBLY DIAGRAM .................................................................................................... 9-1

PACKAGING .................................................................................................................... 10-1

REPLACEMENT PART LIST ........................................................................................... 11-1

CONNECTION DIAGRAMS ............................................................................................. 12-1

BLOACK DIAGRAMS ...................................................................................................... 13-1

LAMP BLUB REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES AND PRECAUTIONS .......................... 14-1

1-2
 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

CAUTION
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK
DO NOT OPEN

CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE

COVER. NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING
TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.

This symbol warns the user that uninsulated voltage within the unit may
have sufficient magnitude to cause electric shock. Therefore, it is dangerous
to make any kind of contact with any part inside of this unit.

This symbol alerts the user that important literature concerning the
operation and maintenance of this unit has been included.
Therefore, it should be read carefully in order to avoid any problems.

ATTENTION
RISQUE D'ELECTROCUTION
NE PAS OUVRIR

MISE EN GARDE: AFIN DE REDUIRE LES RISQUES D' ELECTROCUTION, NE PAS

DEPOSER LE COUVERCLE, IL N'Y A AUCUNE PIECE
UTILISABLE A L'INTERIEUR DE CET APPAREIL. NE CONFIER
LES TRAVAUX D'ENTRETIEN QU'A UN PERSONNEL QUALIFIE.

Ce symbole a pour but de prévenir I' utilisateur de la présence d'

une tension dangereuse, non isolée se trouvant à l' intérieur de l'
appareil. Elle est d' une intensité suffisante pour constituer un risque
d' électrocution. Eviter le contact avec les pièces à l' intérieur de
cet appareil.

Ce symbole a pour but de prévenir l' utilisateur de la présence d'

importantes instructions concernant l' entretien et le fonctionnement
de cet appareil. Par conséquent, elles doivent être lues
attentivement afin d' éviter des problèmes.

WARNING
HEATSINK MAY BE ENERGIZED.
TEST BEFORE TOUCHING.
Heat sink located on the power board, is electrified.
mark is putted on the primary heat sink.
Pay attention to this area.

2-1
 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
During servicing carefully observe the following.
1. OBSERVE ALL PRECAUTIONS
Items and locations that require special care during serv-
icing, such as the cabinet, chassis, and parts are labelled
with individual safety instructions. Carefully comply with
these instructions and all precautions in the instruction
manual.
2. BE CAREFUL OF ELECTRIC SHOCK
The chassis carries an AC voltage. If you touch the
chassis while it is still alive, you will get a severe shock.
If you think the chassis is alive, use an isolating
transformer or gloves, or pull out the plug before
replacing any parts.
3. USE SPECIFIED PARTS
The components have been chosen for minimum
flammability and for specific levels of resistance value
and withstand voltage. Replacement parts must match
these original specifications. Parts whose specifications
are particularly vital to safe use and maintenance of the
set are marked on the circuit diagrams and parts list.
Substitution of these parts can be dangerous for you
and the customer, so use only specified parts.
4. REMOUNT ALL PARTS AND RECONNECT ALL
WIRES AS ORIGINALLY INSTALLED
For safety, insulating tape and tubes are used
throughout, but some lift-off parts on the printed wiring
board require special attention.
All wires are positioned away from high-temperature and
high-voltage parts, and, if removed for servicing, they
must be retuned precisely to their original positions.
2-2
5. LAMP
Be very careful of the lamp because it generates high
heat while it is used at high voltage. When replacing
the bulb, make sure it is cool enough.
6. LENS
Do not look into the lens during projection. This important
to avoid damage to the eyes.
7. SERVICING
At the time of repair or inspection services, use an earth
band (wrist band), without fail.
8. RUN A COMPLETE SAFETY CHECK AT THE
COMPLETION OF SERVICING
After completion of servicing, confirm that all screws,
parts, and wiring, removed or disconnected for servicing,
have been returned to their original positions. Also
examine if the serviced sections and peripheral areas
have suffered from any deterioration as a result of
servicing. In addition, check insulation between external
metallic parts and blades of wall-outlet plugs. This
examination is indispensable in confirming complete
establishment of safety.
(Insulation check)
Pull out a plug from a wall outlet to disconnect the
connection cable. Then turn on the POWER switch.
Use a 500V megger (Note 2) and confirm that the
insulation resistance is 1MΩ or more between each
terminal of the plug and exposed external metal (Note
1). If the measured value is below the specified level,
then it is necessary to inspect and fix the set.
(Note 1)
Exposed external metal....RGB input terminals, control
terminals, etc.
(Note 2)
If a 500V megger is not available for an unavoidable
reason, then use a circuit tester or the like for inspection.
DLP Cinema® Projector

NC800C
User’s Manual

NEC Viewtechnology, Ltd.

 Important Information
WARNING
TO PREVENT FIRE OR SHOCK HAZARDS, DO NOT
EXPOSE THIS UNIT TO RAIN OR MOISTURE. ALSO DO
NOT USE THIS UNIT’S POLARIZED PLUG WITH AN
EXTENSION CORD RECEPTACLE OR OTHER OUTLETS,
UNLESS THE PRONGS CAN BE FULLY INSERTED.
REFRAIN FROM OPENING THE CABINET AS THERE ARE
HIGH-VOLTAGE COMPONENTS INSIDE. REFER
SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.
CAUTION
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK
DO NOT OPEN
CAUTION
TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT
OPEN COVER. NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS
INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE
PERSONNEL.
This symbol warns the user that uninsulated
voltage within the unit may have sufficient
magnitude to cause electric shock. Therefore,
it is dangerous to make any kind of contact
with any part inside of this unit.
This symbol alerts the user that important
literature concerning the operation and
maintenance of this unit has been included.
Therefore, it should be read carefully in order
to avoid any problems.
DOC compliance Notice
This Class A digital apparatus meets all requirements of the
Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment Regulations.
Precautions: Please read this manual carefully before using
your NC800C and keep the manual handy for future reference.
WARNING
This is a Class A product. In a domestic environment this
product may cause radio interference in which case the user
may be required to take adequate measures.
CAUTION
• In order to reduce any interference with radio and television
reception use a signal cable with ferrite core attached.
Use of signal cables without a ferrite core attached may
cause interference with radio and television reception.
• This equipment has been tested and found to comply with
the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15
of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide
reasonable protection against harmful interference when
the equipment is operated in a commercial environment.
This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio
frequency energy and, if not installed and used in
accordance with the installation manual, may cause
harmful interference to radio communications.
Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely
to cause harmful interference in which case the user will
be required to correct the interference at his own expense.
E-1
Important Safeguards
These safety instructions are to ensure the long life of your
projector and to prevent fire and shock. Please read them
carefully and heed all warnings.
Installation
1. Place the projector on a flat, level surface in a dry area
away from dust and moisture. Tilting the front of the
projector up or down from level could reduce lamp life.
Do not put the projector on its side when the lamp is on.
Doing so may cause damage to the projector.
2. Do not place the projector in direct sunlight, near heaters
or heat radiating appliances.
3. Exposure to direct sunlight, smoke or steam could harm
internal components.
4. Handle your projector carefully. Dropping or jarring your
projector could damage internal components.
5. To carry the projector, a minimum of four persons are required.
Do not hold the lens part and the anamorphic lens part with
your hand. Otherwise the projector may tumble or drop, causing
personal injury.
6. Do not place heavy objects on top of the projector.
7. If you wish to have the projector installed on the ceiling:
a Do not attempt to install the projector yourself.
b The projector must be installed by qualified technicians
in order to ensure proper operation and reduce the
risk of bodily injury.
c In addition, the ceiling must be strong enough to
support the projector and the installation must be in
accordance with any local building codes.
d Please consult your dealer for more information.
e Do not attempt to stack projectors on the ceiling.
Power Supply
1. The projector is so designed that it operates with the
power supply voltage described below.
• 1.2kW (Max. 12A) AC100-120V 50/60Hz
• 1.7kW (Max. 8.5A) AC200-240V 50/60Hz
Ensure that your power supply fits this requirement before
attempting to use your projector.
2. Consult your dealer for installing the power cord to the
projector. DO NOT install the power cord by yourself.
Doing so may cause a fire or electric shock.
3. Handle the power cord carefully and avoid excessive
bending. Do not place any heavy objects on the power
cord. A damaged cord can cause electric shock or fire.
4. If the projector will not be used for an extended period of
time, shut down AC power.
5. Placing the power cord and the signal cable closely to
each other can cause beat noise. If this happens, keep
the two separated so that beat noise is not generated.
Beat noise is corruption of the picture often seen as a
rolling band moving through the image.
6. Do not touch the projector during a thunder storm. Doing
so can cause electrical shock or fire.

Cleaning
1. Unplug the projector before cleaning.
2. Clean the cabinet periodically with a damp cloth. If heavily
soiled, use a mild detergent. Never use strong detergents
or solvents such as alcohol or thinner.
3. Use a blower or lens paper to clean the lens, and be
careful not to scratch or mar the lens.
Fire and Shock Precautions
1. Ensure that there is sufficient ventilation and that vents
are unobstructed to prevent potentially dangerous
concentrations of ozone and the build-up of heat inside
your projector. Allow at least 8 inches (20cm) of space
between your projector and a wall. Allow at least 20 inches
(50cm) of space between the ventilation outlet and object.
2. Prevent foreign objects such as paper clips and bits of
paper from falling into your projector. Do not attempt to
retrieve any objects that might fall into your projector. Do
not insert any metal objects such as a wire or screwdriver
into your projector. If something should fall into your
projector, disconnect it immediately and have the object
removed by a qualified service person.
3. Do not place any liquids on top of your projector. Refer servicing
to qualified service personnel if liquid has been spilled.
4. Keep any items such as magnifying glass out of the light
path of the projector. The light being projected from the
lens is extensive, therefore any kind of abnormal objects
that can redirect light coming out of the lens, can cause
unpredictable outcome such as fire or injury to the eyes.
5. Do not cover the lens with the supplied lens cap or
equivalent while the projector is on. Doing so can lead to
melting of the cap and possibly burning your hands due
to the heat emitted from the light output.
6. When using a LAN cable:
For safety, do not connect to the connector for peripheral
device wiring that might have excessive Voltage.
CAUTION: High Pressure Lamp May Explode if Improperly
Handled. Refer Servicing to Qualified Service Personnel.
Lamp Caution: Please read before operation
Due to the lamp being sealed in a pressurized environment,
there is a small risk of explosion, if not operated correctly.
There is minimal risk involved, if the unit is in proper working
order, but if damaged or operated beyond the recommended
hours, the risk of explosion increases. Please note that there
is a warning system built in, that displays following message
when you reach a preset operating time “Over Time Bulb”.
When you see this message please contact your dealer for a
replacement. If the lamp does explode, smoke will be
discharged from the vents located on the back of the unit. Do
not stand in front of the vents during the operation. This smoke
is comprised of glass in particulate form and Xenon gas, and
will not cause harm if kept out of your eyes. If your eyes have
been exposed to this gas, please flush your eyes out with
water immediately and seek immediate medical attention. Do
not rub your eyes! This could cause serious injury.
WARNING:
Do not look into the lens while the projector is on. Serious
damage to your eyes could result.
Important Information
CAUTION
Never unplug the projection head power plug from the outlet
or disconnect the breaker under the following conditions.
Doing so can damage the projector.
• While projecting images
• While cooling after the projector has been turned off. (The
POWER indicator blinks in orange while the fan is rotating,
and the LCD screen is displaying “cooling…”. The cooling
fan continues to work for 3 minutes.)
Remote Control Precautions
• Handle the remote control carefully.
• If the remote control gets wet, wipe it dry immediately.
• Avoid excessive heat and humidity.
• Do not heat, take apart, or throw batteries into fire.
• If you will not be using the remote control for a long time,
remove the batteries.
• Ensure that you have the batteries’ polarity (+/-) aligned
correctly.
• Do not use new and old batteries together, or use different
types of batteries together.
• Dispose of used batteries according to your local regulations.
Disposing of your used product
EU-wide legislation as implemented in each
Member State requires that used electrical and
electronic products carrying the mark (left) must
be disposed of separately from normal
household waste.
This includes projectors and their electrical
accessories or lamps. When you dispose of such
products, please follow the guidance of your local
authority and/or ask the shop where you
purchased the product.
After collecting the used products, they are
reused and recycled in a proper way. This effort
will help us reduce the wastes as well as the
negative impact to the human health and the
environment at the minimum level.
The mark on the electrical and electronic
products only applies to the current European
Union Member States.
For questions relating to unclear points or repairs
Contact your dealer or the following support branches for
questions relating to unclear points, malfunctions and repairs
of the product.
In Europe
NEC Europe, Ltd. / European Technical Centre
Address: Unit G, Stafford Park 12, Telford TF3 3BJ, U.K.
Telephone: +44 1952 237000
Fax Line: +44 1952 237006
In North America
NEC Corporation of America
Digital Cinema Division
Address: 4111 West Alameda Avenue Suite 412 Burbank,
CA 91505
Telephone: 818 557 2500
*If the above line is busy, please dial as below;
Telephone: 866 632 6431
E-2
 Important Information
Précaution: lire attentivement ce manuel avant d’utiliser le
NC800C et le conserver à portée de main pour future
référence.
AVERTISSEMENT
POUR EVITER UN INCENDIE OU UN RISQUE
D’ELECTROCUTION NE PAS EXPOSER CET ENSEMBLE
A LA PLUIE OU A L’HUMIDITE; DE MEME, NE PAS
BRANCHER LA PRISE POLAIRE AVEC UNE RALLONGE
A MOINS QUE LES BROCHES DE LA PREMIERE NE S’Y
INSERENT PLEINEMENT.
EVITER D’OUVRIR LE COFFRET CAR IL Y A, A
L’INTERIEUR DES COMPOSANTS SOUMIS A UNE
HAUTE-TENSION; POUR LES REPARATIONS,
S’ADRESSER A UN PERSONNEL QUALIFIE.
ATTENTION
RISQUE D’ELECTROCUTION
NE PAS OUVRIR
ATTENTION
POUR EVITER LES RISQUES D’ELECTROCUTION, NE
PAS OUVRIR LE COUVERCLE. AUCUN DES
ELEMENTS INTERNES NE DOIT ETRE REPARE PAR
L’UTILISATEUR. NE CONFIER L’ENTRETIEN QU’A UN
PERSONNEL QUALIFIE.
L’éclair fléché dans un triangle équilatéral est
destiné à avertir l’utilisateur de la présence,
dans l’appareil, d’une zone non-isolée soumise
à une haute-tension dont l’intensité èst
suffisante pour constituer un risque
d’électrocution.
Le point d’exclamation dans un triangle
équilatéral est destiné à attirer l’attention de
l’utilisateur sur la présence d’informations de
fonctionnement et d’entretien importantes dans
la brochure accompagnant l’appareil.
DOC avis de conformité
Cet appareil numérique de la classe A respecte toutes les
exigences du Réglement sur le Matériel D’interférence du Canada.
Recommandations importantes
Ces instructions de sécurité ont pour but d’assurer une longue
vie à votre projecteur et d’éviter un incendie ou une décharge
électrique. Prière de les lire attentivement et de tenir compte
de tous les avertissements.
Installation
1. Placer le projecteur sur une surface plane et de niveau,
et dans un endroit sec et à l’abri des poussières et de
l’humidité.
2. Ne pas exposer le projecteur aux rayons directs du soleil,
ni le placer près d’un chauffage ou de dispositifs de
radiation de chaleur.
F-1
3. L’exposition aux rayons directs du soleil, à la fumée ou à
la vapeur pourrait endommager des composants internes.
4. Manipuler le projecteur avec précaution. La chute du le
projecteur ou lui donner des chocs pourrait endommager
des composants internes.
5. Le transport du projecteur doit être effectué par
quatre personnes au minimum.
Ne pas saisir le projecteur par son objectif ni par
les des anamorphoseurs. Le cas échéant, le
projecteur risque de se renverser ou de tomber et
d’être à l’origine d’un accident corporel.
6. Ne pas poser d’objets lourds sur le dessus du projecteur.
7. Si vous voulez installer le projecteur au plafond:
a. N’essayez pas d’installer le projecteur vous-même.
b. Le projecteur doit être installé par un technicien
qualifié pour garantir une installation réussie et réduire
le risque d’éventuelles blessures corporelles.
c. De plus le plafond doit être suffisamment solide pour
supporter le projecteur et l’installation doit être conforme
aux réglementations locales de construction.
d. Veuillez consulter votre revendeur pour de plus
amples informations.
e. Ne pas superposer les projecteurs accrochés au plafond.
Alimentation
1. Le projecteur est conçu pour fonctionner sous la tension
d’alimentation ci-dessous.
• 1.2kW (Max. 12A) CA100-120V 50/60Hz
• 1.7kW (Max. 8.5A) CA200-240V 50/60Hz
S’assurer que la tension du secteur soit conforme à ces
caractéristiques avant d’utiliser le projecteur.
2. Pour l’installation du cordon d’alimentation électrique sur
le projecteur, voir le concessionnaire. NE PAS intaller le
cordon d’alimentation électrique soi-même. Il y a risque
d’incendie ou d’électrocution.
3. Manipuler le cordon d’alimentation avec précaution et
éviter des flexions excessives. Ne placez pas d’objets
lourds sur le cordon d’alimentation. Un cordon
endommagé peut occasionner une décharge électrique
ou un incendie.
4. Si le projecteur n’est pas utilisé pendant une longue
période, coupez l’alimentation CA.
5. Placer le cordon d’alimentation et le câble de signal tout
prés l’un de l’autre peut occasionner un bruit de battement.
Si cela se produit, les maintenir séparés jusqu’à ce que
le bruit de battement disparaisse.
6. Ne pas toucher le projecteur pendant un orage. Cela
pourrait causer un choc électrique ou un incendie.
Nettoyage
1. Débrancher le projecteur avant de le nettoyer.
2. Nettoyer régulièrement le boîtier extérieur avec un chiffon
humide. S’il est trés sale, utiliser un détergent doux. Ne
jamais utiliser de détergent forts ou de solvants tels que
de l’alcool ou du diluant.
3. Utiliser un souffleur ou du papier pour objectif pour nettoyer
l’objectif, et veiller à ne pas rayer ou endommager l’objectif.

Précautions contre l’incendie ou la décharge
1. S’assurer qu’il y ait une ventilation suffisante et que les
ouvertures ne soient pas obstruées afin d’éviter des
concentrations potentiellement dangereuses d’ozone et
l’accumulation de chaleur à l’intérieur du projecteur.
Laisser au moins 20 cm d’espace entre le projecteur et
un mur.Veuillez laisser un espace libre d’au moins 50 cm
(20 pouces) entre les orifices de ventilation
2. Empêcher tous cocps étrangers tels que des attaches
trombones ou des morceaux de papier de tomber à
l’intérieur du projecteur. Ne pas essayer de récuperer des
objets qui seraient tombés dans le projecteur. Ne pas
introduire d’objets métalliques tels que fil ou un tournevis
dans le projecteur. En cas de chute d’objet dans le
projecteur, le débrancher immédiatement et faire enlever
l’objet par un technicien agréé.
3. Ne pas poser de liquides sur le dessus du projecteur.
Confier la réparation à du personnel technique qualifié si
du liquide a été renversé.
4. Maintenez tout ce qui s’apparente à une loupe en dehors
du faisceau lumineux du projecteur. La lumière projetée
par l’objectif est très puissante, de sorte que tout objet
en opposition pourrait dévier le faisceau provenant de
l’objectif, ce qui pourrait avoir des conséquences
imprévues telles qu’un incendie ou une lésion occulaire.
5. Ne bouchez pas l’objectif avec son couvercle fourni
lorsque le projecteur est allumé. Faire cela pourrait faire
fondre le couvercle et peut-être brûler vos mains à cause
de la châleur émise par le faisceau lumineux.
ATTENTION: La lampe à haute pression peut exploser si
elle est manipulée incorrectement. Confier
l’entretien à du personnel d’entretien qualifié.
Précautions avec la lampe : lire avant l’utilisation
La lampe a été scellée dans un environnement sous pression,
et il y a donc un petit risque d’explosion, si elle n’est pas utilisée
correctement. Le risque est minime si l’appareil est en bon
ordre de marche, mais s’il est endommagé ou utilisé au-delà
du nombre d’heures recommandées, le risque d’explosion
augmente alors. Il est à noter l’existence d’un systéme
d’avertissement intégré, lequel affiche le message “Over Time
Bulb” lorsqu’un temps de fonctionnement préréglé est atteint.
Si la lampe explose, de la fumée peut étre produite par les
fentes d’aération situées sur l’arrière de l’appareil. Ne vous
tenez pas devant les évents pendant l’opération. Cette fumée
est composée de verre sous forme de particules et de gaz
de Xenon, et n’est pas nuisible si elle est maintenue à
distance des yeux. Si les yeux sont exposés a ce gaz, les
rincer immédiatement à l’eau courante et con sulter tout de
suite un médecin. Ne pas se frotter les yeux ! Cela pourrait
provoquer une grave blessure.
AVERTISSEMENT:
Ne pas regarder dans l’objectif lorsque le projecteur est allumé.
De sérieux dommages aux yeux pourraient en résulter.
Important Information
ATTENTION
Ne jamais débrancher la prise d’alimentation à tête de
projection ni débrancher le disjoncteur dans les conditions
suivantes. Cela pourrait endommager le projecteur.
• Lors de la projection d’images
• Pendant le refroidissement après que le projecteur ait été
éteinte. (Le voyant POWER clignote en orange lorsque le
ventilateur fonctionne, et l’écran ACL affiche « cooling… ».
le ventilateur du refroidissement continuent à tourner
pendant 3 minutes.)
Précautions se rapportant á la télécommande
• Manipuler la télécommande avec précaution.
• Si la télécommande est mouillée, I’essuyer immédiatement.
• Evitar toute chaleur chaleur excessive et l’humidité.
• Ne pas chauffer, démonter ou jeter les piles au feu.
• Si la télécommande n’est pas utilisée pendant une longue
période, retirer les piles.
• S’assurer de respecter la polarité (+/–) des piles.
• Ne pas utiliser des piles neuves et des piles usagées en méme
temps et ne pas utiliser des piles de différents types ensemble.
• Mettre les piles usagées au redut d’parés la réglementation
locales.
Mise au rebut du produit usagé
La législation européenne, appliquée dans tous
les Etats membres, exige que les produits
électriques et électroniques portant la marque
(à gauche) doivent être mis au rebut séparément
des autres ordures ménagères. Ceci inclus les
projecteurs et leurs accessoires électriques ou
lampes. Lorsque vous mettez au rebut ces
produits, veuillez suivre les recommandations
des autorités locales et/ou demandez conseil au
magasin qui vous a vendu le produit.
Une fois ces produits mis au rebut, ils sont
recyclés et de manière appropriée. Cet effort nous
aidera à réduire les déchets et à maintenir au
niveau minimum leurs conséquences négatives
sur la santé humaine et sur l’environnement.
La marque figurant sur les produits électriques
et électroniques ne s’applique qu’aux Etats
membres actuels de l’Union Européenne.
Si vous avez des questions concernant des points
peu clairs ou des réparations
Contacter votre distributeur ou les branches d’assistance
suivantes si vous avez des questions concernant des points
à éclaircir, des défauts et des réparations du produit.
En Europe
NEC Europe, Ltd. / European Technical Centre
Adresse : Unit G, Stafford Park 12, Telford TF3 3BJ, U.K.
Téléphone : +44 1952 237000
Fax : +44 1952 237006
En Amérique du Nord
NEC Corporation of America
Division Cinéma Numérique
Adresse : 4111 West Alameda Avenue Suite 412 Burbank,
CA 91505
Téléphone : 818 557 2500
*Si la ligne ci-dessus est occupée, essayer le numéro suivant ;
Téléphone : 866 632 6431
F-2
 Important Information
Maschinenlärminformations-Verordnung – 3. GPSGV,
Der höchste Schalldruckpegel beträgt 70 dB(A) oder weniger
gemäß EN ISO 7779.
WARNUNG
ZUR VERMEIDUNG VON FEUER UND ELEKTRISCHEN
SCHLÄGEN DARF DAS GERÄT WEDER REGEN NOCH
FEUCHTIGKEITAUSGESETZT WERDEN. DER POLARISIERTE
STECKER DIESES GERÄTES DARF NUR DANN IN EIN
VERLÄNGERUNGSKABEL ODER IN EINE STECKDOSE
EINGESTECKT WERDEN, WENN DIE STECKKONTAKTE
VOLLSTÄNDIG EINGESTECKT WERDEN KONNEN.
UNTERLASSEN SIE, DAS GERÄT ZU OFFNEN, DA DADURCH
IM GERÄT FREILIEGENDE HOCHSPANNUNGSFÜHRENDE
TEILE BERÜHRT WERDEN KÖNNEN. LASSEN SIE DEN
KUNDENDIENST NUR VON HIERFÜR QUALIFIZIERTEN
PERSONEN DURCHFÜHREN.
ACHTUNG
GEFAHR DURCH ELEKTRISCHEN
SCHLAG
NICHT ÖFFNEN
ACHTUNG
ZUR VERMEIDUNG EINES ELEKTRISCHEN SCHLAGES
ÖFFNEN SIE NICHT DAS GEHÄUSE. INNERHALB DES
GEHÄUSES BEFINDEN SICH KEINE FÜR DIE
BEDIENUNG DES GERÄTES ERFORDERLICHEN TEILE.
LASSEN SIE DEN KUNDENDIENST NUR VON HIERFÜR
QUALIFIZIERTEN PERSONEN DURCHFÜHREN.
DIESES SYMBOL WARNT DEN BEDIENER,
DASS INNERHALB DES GERÄTES
UNISOLIERTE TEILE VORHANDEN SIND, DIE
HOCHSPANNUNG FÜHREN UND DEREN
BERÜHRUNG EINEN ELEKTRISCHEN
SCHLAG VERURSACHEN KANN.
DIESES SYMBOL MACHT DEN BËDIENER
DARAUF AUFMERKSAM, DASS WICHTIGE,
DEN BETRIEB UND
DIE WARTUNG DES GERÄTES BETREFFENDE
SCHRIFTEN BEIGEFÜGT SIND. UM
IRGENDWELCHE PROBLEME ZU VERMEIDEN,
SOLLTEN DIESE BESCHREIBUNGEN
SORGFÄLTIG GELESEN WERDEN.
Vorsichtsmaßnahmen: Lesen Sie sich dieses Handbuch
bitte sorgfaltig durch, bevor Sie den NC800C benutzen, und
bewahren Sie das Bedienungshandbuch in greifbarer Nahe
als spatere Referenz auf.
Wichtige Sicherheitshinweise
Diese Sicherheitshinweise sollen eine lange Lebensdauer
Ihres Projektors sicherstellen und vor Feuer und elektrischen
Schlägen schützen. Lesen Sie diese Hinweise sorgfältig
durch und beachten Sie alle Warnungen.
Installation
1. Stellen Sie den Projektor auf eine flache, waagerechte Fläche
in einer trockenen Umgebung; frei von Staub und Feuchtigkeit.
G-1
2. Stellen Sie den Projektor weder in direktes Sonnenlicht
noch in die Nähe einer Heizung oder sonstiger Hitze
abstrahlender Einrichtungen.
3. Wenn das Gerät direktem Sonnenlicht, Rauch oder
Dampf ausgesetzt wird, können interne Komponenten
beschadigt werden.
4. Behandeln Sie Ihren Projektor vorsichtig. Fallenlassen oder
starkes Schutteln kann interne Komponenten beschädigen.
5. Zum Tragen des Projektors werden mindestens vier
Personen benötigt Den Projektor nicht am Linsenbereich
ode den anamorphotischen Linsenwelle tragen.
Beschädigungs und Verletzungsgefahr.
6. Legen Sie keine schweren Gegenstände auf den Projektor.
7. Wenn der Projektor an der Decke installiert werden soll:
a Versuchen Sie nicht, den Projektor selbst zu installieren.
b Der Projektor muss von qualifizierten Technikern installiert
werden, um einen ordnungsgemäßen Betrieb
sicherzustellen und die Verletzungsgefahr zu reduzieren.
c Die Decke muss für das Gewicht des Projektors
ausreichende Festigkeit aufweisen, und die
Installation muss entsprechend den örtlichen
Bauvorschriften ausgeführt werden.
d Weitere Informationen erhalten Sie von Ihrem Fachhändler.
e Versuchen Sie nicht, mehrere Projektoren an der
Decke übereinander zu stapeln.
Spannungsversorgung
1. Der Projektor wurde so konzipiert, dass er mit der unten
aufgeführten Netzspannung läuft.
• 1.2kW (Max. 12A) 100-120V Wechselstrom, 50/60Hz
• 1.7kW (Max. 8.5A) 200-240V Wechselstrom, 50/60Hz
Stellen Sie sicher, dass die vorhandene Spannungsversorgung
diesen Vorgaben entspricht, bevor Sie versuchen, Ihren
Projektor zu betreiben.
2. Zum Installieren des Netzkabels am Projektor wenden
Sie sich bitte an Ihren Fachhändler. UNTER KEINEN
UMSTÄNDEN versuchen, das Netzkabel selbst zu
installieren. Brand- und Schlaggefahr.
3. Behandeln Sie das Netzkabel vorsichtig und vermeiden
Sie Knicke. Legen Sie keine schweren Gegenständde
das Netzkabel. Ein beschädigtes Netzkabel kann
elektrische Schläge oder einen Brand verursachen.
4. Wenn der Projektor über eine längere Zeit nicht genutzt
wird, schalten Sie die Stromversorgung ab.
5. Wenn Sie das Netzkabel und das Signalkabel in unmittelbarer
Nähe zueinander platzieren, kann Überlagerungsrauschen
auftreten. Vergrößern Sie in einem derartigen Fall den Abstand
zwischen diesen beiden Kabeln.
6. Berühren Sie den Projektor auf keinen Fall während eines
Gewitters. Wenn Sie dies nicht beachten, kann dies zu
einem elektrischen Schlag oder einem Feuer führen.
Reinigung
1. Trennen Sie den Projektor vor der Reinigung von der
Netzsteckdose ab.
2. Reinigen Sie das Gehäuse regelmäßig mit einem feuchten Tuch.
Bei starker Verschmutzung verwenden Sie ein mildes
Reinigungsmittel. Reinigen Sie das Gerät niemals mit starken
Reinigungsoder Lösungs-mitteln wiez.B. Alkohol oder Verdünner.
3. Reinigen Sie die Linse mit einer Blaseinrichtung oder einem
Linsentuch. Beachten Sie dabei, dass die Linsenoberfläche
weder zerkratzt noch auf andere Weise beschädigt wird.

Vorsichtsmasnahmen zur Vermeidung von Bränden
und elektrischen Schlägen
1. Sorgen Sie für ausreichende Belüuftung und stellen Sie
außerdem sicher, dass die Lüftungsschlitze frei bleiben, damit
sich innerhalb des Projektors kein Hitzestau bilden kann.
Lassen Sie mindestens 20 cm Abstand zwischen Ihrem
Projektor und der Wand. Der Abstand zwischen den Belüftung
und anderen Gegenständen sollte mindestens 50cm betragen.
2. Vermeiden Sie, dass Fremdgegenstande wie Büroklammern
und Papierschnipsel in den Projektor fallen. Versuchen Sie
nicht, in den Projektor gefallene Gegenstände selbst zu
entfernen. Stecken Sie keine Metallgegenstände wie einen
Draht oder Schraubendreher in Ihren Projektor. Wenn etwas
in den Projektor gefallen ist, müssen Sie sofort den Netzstecker
ziehen und den Gegenstand von qualifiziertem
Servicepersonal entfernen lassen.
3. Stellen Sie keine mit Flüssigkeit gefüllten Gefäße auf Ihren
Projektor. Überlassen Sie die Reparatur ausschließlich
qualifiziertem Servicepersonal, wenn Flüssigkeit
verschüttet worden ist.
4. Lichtkegel des Projektors fern. Da das von der Linse projizierte
Licht umfassend ist, können alle abnormalen Gegenstände,
die in der Lage sind, das aus der Linse austretende Licht
umzulenken, unvorhersehbare Ereignisse wie z.B. einen Brand
oder Augenverletzungen verursachen.
5. Bedecken Sie die Linse nicht mit der mitgelieferten Linsenkape
o.ä. wärend der Projektor eingeschaltet ist. Dies kann ein
Schmelzen der Kappe verursachen. Darüber hinaus würden
Sie sich aufgrund der vom Lichtausgang abgestrahlten Hitze
wahrscheinlich die Hände verbrennen.
VORSICHT: Bei unsachgemäßer Handhabung kann die
Hochdrucklampe explodieren. Überlassen Sie
die Reparatur ausschließlich qualifiziertem
Servicepersonal.
Vorsichtsmaßnahmen bezüglich der Lampe: Bitte vor
dem Betrieb durchlesen
Aufgrund der unter Druck luftdicht verschlossenen Lampe besteht
bei falscher Handhabung eine geringe Explosionsgefahr. Wenn
sich das Gerät in einwandfreiem Zustand befindet, ist dieses Risiko
minimal; die Explosionsgefahr erhöht sich jedoch im Falle einer
Beschädigung oder bei einer Benutzung über die empfohlenen
Betriebsstunden hinaus. Beachten Sie bitte, dass im Gerät ein
Warnsystem integriert ist, das bei Erreichen der voreingestellten
Betriebsdauer die nachfolgende Meldung anzeigt: “Over Time Bulb”.
Im Falle einer Lampenexplosion tritt aus den Lüftungsschlitzen
der Rückseite des Gerätes Rauch aus. Stehen Sie nicht vor den
Entlüftungsöffnungen während des Betriebes. Dieser Rauch
besteht aus einer ganz besonderen Form von Glas und aus
Xenon-Gas. Solange dieser Rauch nicht in die Augen gelangt,
bestehen keinerlei gesundheitliche Risiken.
Wenn Ihre Augen dem Gas ausgesetzt worden sind, spülen
Sie die Augen bitte sofort mit Wasser aus und konsultieren
Sie einen Arzt. Reiben Sie die Augen nicht!
Dies könnte ernsthafte Verletzungen zur Folge haben.
WARNUNG:
Schauen Sie nicht in die Linse, wenn der Projektor eingeschaltet
ist. Dies könnte schwere Augenverletzungen zur Folge haben.
VORSICHT
Ziehen Sie den Projektor-Hauptnetzstecker nicht vom Ausgang
ab, und trennen Sie den Unterbrecher, unter den folgenden
Bedingungen nicht ab. Anderenfalls kann der Projektor
beschädigt werden.
Important Information
• Während der Projizierung von Bildern
• Während des Abkühlens, nach dem Projektor ausgeschaltet
worden ist. (Die POWER-Anzeige blinkt orange, während
das Gebläse in Betrieb ist, und auf der LCD-Anzeige wird
“cooling…” angezeigt. Das abkühlende fan fährt fort, für 3
Minuten zu arbeiten.)
Vorsichtsmaßnahmen zur Fernbedienung
• Behandeln Sie die Fernbedienung mit Sorgfalt.
• Wischen Sie die Fernbedienung sofort trocken, wenn sie
einmal nass geworden sein sollte.
• Vermeiden Sie übermäßige Hitze und Feuchtigkeit.
• Erhitzen Sie die Batterien nicht, nehmen Sie sie nicht
auseinander und werfen Sie sie nicht ins Feuer.
• Nehmen Sie die Batterien heraus, wenn Sie beabsichtigen, die
Fernbedienung über einen Iängeren Zeitraum hinweg nicht zu benutzen.
• Stellen Sie sicher, dass die Batteriepole (+/-) richtig ausgerichtet sind.
• Verwenden Sie niemals verschiedene Batterietypen oder
neue und alte Batterien zusammen.
• Entsorgen Sie leere Batterien entsprechen den an lhrem
Wohnortgeltenden Bestimmungen
Entsorgung Ihres benutzten Gerätes
Die EU-weite Gesetzgebung, wie sie in jedem
einzelnen Mitgliedstaat gilt, bestimmt, dass benutzte
elektrische und elektronische Geräte mit dieser
Markierung (links) getrennt vom normalen
Haushaltsabfall entsorgt werden müssen.
Dies schließt Projektoren und deren elektrisches
Zubehör oder ihre Lampen mit ein. Folgen Sie beim
Entsorgen eines solchen Gerätes bitte denAnweisungen
Ihrer örtliche Behörde und/oder konsultieren Sie den
Händler, bei dem Sie das Gerät erworben haben.
Nach der Sammlung benutzter Geräte werden diese
erneut verwendet und entsprechend den
Umweltbestimmungen recycelt. Das trägt dazu bei,
die Abfallmenge zu reduzieren sowie die negativen
Auswirkungen auf die menschliche Gesundheit und
die Umwelt möglichst gering zu halten.
Die Markierung auf elektrischen und elektronischen
Geräten gilt nur für die gegenwärtigen
Mitgliedsstaaten der Europäischen Union.
Bei Fragen, die sich aus unklaren Punkten oder
Reparaturarbeiten ergeben
Bei Fragen, die sich aus unklaren Punkten, Fehlfunktionen oder
Reparaturarbeiten am Produkt ergeben, wenden Sie sich an Ihren
Händler oder an eine der folgenden Niederlassungen.
In Europa
NEC Europe, Ltd. / European Technical Centre
Addresse: Unit G, Stafford Park 12, Telford TF3 3BJ, U.K.
Telefon: +44 1952 237000
Fax-Nummer: +44 1952 237006
In Nordamerika
NEC Corporation of America
Digital-Cinema-Abteilung
Adresse: 4111 West Alameda Avenue Suite 412 Burbank,
CA 91505
Telefon: 818 557 2500
*Falls die oben aufgeführte Leitung besetzt sein sollte, wählen
Sie bitte die folgende Nummer;
Telefon: 866 632 6431
G-2
 Important Information

(MEMO)

G-3
Table of Contents

Table of Contents ............................................................................ 1

1.What’s in the Box? and the Names of the Projector Parts ............. 2
1-1. Features .................................................................................................................................................................... 2
1-2. What’s in the Box? ................................................................................................................................................... 4
1-3. Names of the Projector Parts .................................................................................................................................. 5
1-4. Names on the Remote Control .............................................................................................................................. 11

2.Installation and Connection ....................................................... 14

2-1. Steps for setting up and connecting .................................................................................................................... 14
2-2. Connecting the image input terminals ................................................................................................................. 15
2-3. Connecting the various control terminal ............................................................................................................. 16
2-4. Connecting the power cord ................................................................................................................................... 17

3.Projection of Images (Basic Operation) ...................................... 18

3-1. Steps of projecting images ................................................................................................................................... 18
3-2. Turning your projector on ..................................................................................................................................... 19
3-3. Selecting the title of input signal .......................................................................................................................... 21
3-4. Adjusting the position and the size of projected screen .................................................................................... 22
3-5. Turning your projector off ..................................................................................................................................... 24

4.Using Menus .............................................................................. 25

4-1. Basic operation with adjustment menus ............................................................................................................. 25
4-2. Table of adjustment menus ................................................................................................................................... 29
4-3. Title Select .............................................................................................................................................................. 30
4-4. Configuration .......................................................................................................................................................... 31
4-5. Title Setup ............................................................................................................................................................... 31
4-6. Information .............................................................................................................................................................. 32

5.Maintenance of Your Projector ................................................... 34

5-1. Cleaning the Cabinet .............................................................................................................................................. 34
5-2. Cleaning the Lens .................................................................................................................................................. 34

6.Appendix .................................................................................... 35
6-1. Troubleshooting ..................................................................................................................................................... 35
6-2. Indicator display list ............................................................................................................................................... 37
6-3. Error code list ......................................................................................................................................................... 38
6-4. Operation using an HTTP browser ....................................................................................................................... 40
6-5. Outline Drawing ...................................................................................................................................................... 42
6-6. Specifications ......................................................................................................................................................... 43
6-7. Pin Assignment and Functions of Terminal ......................................................................................................... 46
6-8. Related products list .............................................................................................................................................. 51

1
 1.
What’s in the Box? and
the Names of the
Projector Parts

1-1. Features
• Compact projector for dedicated use with DLP Cinema®
We have made the projector and the lamp console into one unit and achieved a quite compact projector exclusively used for
DLP Cinema®.
• Various setups possible thanks to a variety of optional lens units and the facility for invertedinstallation
The DLP Cinema® projector is provided with a lens memory function for storing lens zoom positions and shift positions to set
screens sizes for each input signal. It is also provided with a lamp power memory function for storing the brightness of the
images on the screen for each input signal.
Even if you are projecting multiple images that have different settings for image sizes and brightness, you can project them with
the conditions pre-registered for each signal, simply by selecting the corresponding signal.
• Equipped with easy to use functions
(1) Lens memory function that can be operated with one touch, and lamp power memory function
The DLP Cinema® projector is provided with a lens memory function for storing lens zoom positions and shift positions to
set screens sizes for each input signal. It is also provided with a lamp power memory function for storing the brightness of
the images on the screen for each input signal.
Even if you are projecting multiple images that have different settings for image sizes and brightness, you can project them
with the conditions pre-registered for each signal, simply by selecting the corresponding signal.
(2) Equipped with a lamp output control function
You can set to any brightness setting, from low brightness to high brightness. This function makes it possible to minimize
the fluctuation (*) in brightness as brightness of the lamp decreases as a result of long-term lamp usage.
* The time for maintaining fluctuations in brightness depends on the setting value for brightness.
(3) Registered signal selection buttons
The projector has been equipped with new 8 signal selection buttons that make it easy to select registered signals. Up to
8 signals can be selected.

2
 1. What’s in the Box? and the Names of the Projector Parts
• Up-to-date functions of DLP Cinema® available
This projector supports CineLinkTM, CineCanvasTM, CinePalletteTM and CineBlackTM which are the new functions for security,
subtitles, etc., developed by Texas Instruments Incorporated.
(1) CineLinkTM: Security management
This function supports encryption of the local link between server and projector, adds a “watermark” to enable the tracing
of pirated films (illegal copying), and provides other functions.
(2) CineCanvasTM: Image management
This function enables insertion of subtitles and captions, correction of distortion, changing of resolution, etc.
(3) CinePalletteTM: Color management
This function allows extension of color range, correction of color, etc.
(4) CineBlackTM: Contrast management
This function realizes a color tone scale from pitch black to pure white.

• DLP, DLP Cinema and their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of Texas Instruments.
• CineLink, CineCanvas, CinePallette, and CineBlack are trademarks of Texas Instruments.

3
1. What’s in the Box? and the Names of the Projector Parts

1-2. What’s in the Box?

Check the content of the accessories.

NC800C projector Lens holder (NC-PH01)

MMS
STATUS

Small iris x 1

Remote control (RD-371E)

Wire stopper x 1

UM-3 AA size battery (for the remote control) x 2

Sheet of title labels (for 20 labels) x 2

Remote cable (4 m) x 1

User’s Manual (This document)

Remote cable (16 m) x 1 User’s Manual

Power cord (grounded)

Connect this projector to the power outlet.
Three types of power cords are supplied with this projector: for Japan, for the U.S. and for European countries.

・ Power cord for Europe (AC230V) ・ Power cord for North America (AC120V) ・ Power cord for Japan (AC100V)

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
TIP • In the event that you did not receive all of the accessories outlined above, or some are damaged, contact
your dealer/distributor.
Differs slightly from the drawings in this manual, but there is no problem in actual use.
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

4
 1. What’s in the Box? and the Names of the Projector Parts

1-3. Names of the Projector Parts

1-3-1. Front of the projector

1
MMS
STAT
US
6

2
3

5
4
1. Air inlet
Air is taken in here to provide cooling of the projector.
2. Control panel
On the control panel, power to your projector is turned on or off, signals are selected, and various
adjustments are made of projected screen. (See page 9)
3. Connection terminals
Various image signal cables are to be connected here. (See page 7)
4. Feet (in four positions on the bottom)
In the ordinary installation, you can adjust the projector inclination at 4 positions.
5. Carrying handles
Hold the carrying handles when carrying your projector.
There are a total of two carrying handles, a set of bottom ones on the front and the back of your projector.
6. Lens (optional)
Images are projected from the lens. Please contact your dealer/distributor to install or replace the lens.

NOTE Do not cover the air inlet and outlet during operation. Inadequate air intake may lead to a rise in inside
temperature, thus causing a fire or serious projector failure.

5
1. What’s in the Box? and the Names of the Projector Parts

1-3-2. Rear of the projector

4
1
2

6 3
1. Air inlet
Air is taken in here to provide cooling of the projector.
2. Air outlet
The heat of the lamp is vented here.
3. Power cord
Connect the power cord to an AC outlet.
4. Function ground
The function ground is used when you wish to establish a common ground potential between the projector and the image-
sending device or other equipment.
This is not a power supply ground terminal.
5. Main power switch
Connect the power cord to an AC outlet and set the main power switch to ON, then your projector will enter a standby state.
6. Lamp cover
The lamp house is accommodated. Mount and remove the lamps from here. For lamp mounting and removal, consult with
your dealer.

NOTE • Do not cover the air inlet and outlet during operation. Inadequate air intake may lead to a rise in inside
temperature, thus causing a fire or serious projector failure.
• Do not touch the air outlet when your projector is operating. Otherwise, the high temperature may cause
burns.

6
 1. What’s in the Box? and the Names of the Projector Parts

1-3-3. Connection terminals

1 2 3 4 5

6 7

10

11 12
1. Remote control input terminal (REMOTE IN) (Stereo mini)
Connect the remote control of the projector, using the supplied remote control cable.

Memo
• The projector’s remote control can be used by connecting with the remote control cable. (See page 13)

2. PC control signal switch (CINEMA/SYSTEM)

Use this to set data on the projector.
3. PC control terminal (RS-232C) (D-Sub 9P)
This is used when the service personnel sets the data for the projector or operates the projector from PC via RS-232C. Use
a commercially available RS-232C straight cable to connect the projector to the PC.
4. PC card slot
• Set a wireless LAN card, and you can control the projector from a PC, using a wireless LAN Please inquire your dealer/
distributor about a wireless LAN card that can be used.
• Use this slot when doing maintenance on your projector.
5. USB port (USB) (type A)
Use this port when doing maintenance on your projector.
6. HDSDI A input terminal (SDI-A) (BNC)
Connect a Video Server of Video source to this terminal. Use a 75Ω coaxial cable.
7. HDSDI B input terminal (SDI-B) (BNC)
Connect a Video Server or Video source to this terminal. Use a 75Ω coaxial cable.
8. DVI-D A input terminal (DVI-A) (DVI-D 24P)
Connect the DVI-D output terminal of a PC to this terminal. Use a commercially available DVI-D signal cable (Single Link).

7
1. What’s in the Box? and the Names of the Projector Parts
9. DVI-D B input terminal (DVI-B) (DVI-D 24P)
Connect the DVI-D output terminal of a PC to this terminal. Use a commercially available DVI-D signal cable (Single Link).
10. External control terminal (GP I/O) (D-Sub 37P)
Use this terminal when controlling your projector from an external switcher. (See page 48)
11. Ethernet port (LAN-A, LAN-B) (RJ-45)
Use this port when controlling your projector in LAN connection from a PC. Use a commercially available LAN cable
(10Base-T/100Base-T) to connect the projector to the PC.
12. Ethernet port for the touch panel (TOUCH PANEL) (RJ-45)
This terminal is for future extensions.

8
 1. What’s in the Box? and the Names of the Projector Parts

1-3-4. Control panel

3 1 2 8 9

MMS
STATUS

4 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 5 6 7
1. Remote control light reception unit
This receives signals from the remote control.
2. BACKLIGHT switch
Operate this switch to turn on/off the back light of the LCD screen and operation panel.
3. MMS STATUS indicator
This indicates the link status of the optional multi-media switcher (MMS).

Off When not using multi-media switcher.

Orange lighting When linked to multi-media switcher.
Orange blinking Preparing link with multimedia switcher.
Red blinking When a link error occurs.

4. LCD screen
The liquid crystal display screen shows menus and setting values for the operation of your projector.
5. POWER button
Press this button to turn on or off (standby) he power to your projector. Press this for more than three seconds.
When turning on the power to the projector, first set the main power switch to the main unit to ON, thereby setting the
projector in a standby state. (See page 19)
6. POWER indicator

Green lighting When power is on.

Green blinking When the douser is closed.
Orange lighting When the power is off (in standby state).
Orange blinking When the cooling fan(s) is running immediately after power-off.

7. STATUS indicator

Off When the projector is operating normally.

Red blinking When an error has occurred.
An error code is displayed on the LCD screen.

8. CTL (MACRO) button

Press the CTL (MACRO) button together with MACRO SELECT 1 to 8 buttons.
MACRO SELECT<1> to <8> button does not work individually.

9
 1. What’s in the Box? and the Names of the Projector Parts
9. 1 to 8 buttons
Press the 1 to 8 buttons while depressing the CTL (MACRO) button to select titles (input signals) assigned to each button.
To this projector, 100 titles at most can be registered (input signal registration). Among the registered titles, any 8 titles can
be assigned to the buttons <1> to <8>.
The indicator to the left of the buttons show the assigned/selected status of titles.
Request your dealer/distributor for details on registering and changing titles.

Green lighting When any title is assigned to the button.

Orange lighting When title is selected.
Off When any title is not assigned to the button.

10. CTL (LAMP) button

Press the CTL (LAMP) button together with the LAMP +/- buttons.
<LAMP +/-> button does not work individually.
11. LAMP +/- buttons
Press the LAMP +/- buttons while depressing the CTL (LAMP) button to adjust the output (brightness) of the lamp. (See
page 23)
12. MENU button
Press this button, and menus for various settings and adjustments will be displayed. (See page 26)
13. [MENU CTL] UP/DOWN/LEFT/RIGHT buttons
Press the [MENU CTL] UP/DOWN/LEFT/RIGHT buttons when the menu is displayed to select menu items.
14. CANCEL button
Press the CANCEL button to return to previous menu item.
15. ENTER button
Press the ENTER button, and the displayed menu item is actioned.
16. FOCUS +/- buttons
Press the FOCUS +/- buttons while depressing the CTL (LENS) button to adjust the focus of the projected image.
(See page 23)
17. ZOOM +/- buttons
Press these buttons while depressing the CTL (LENS) button, for fine adjustment of the size of projected image.
(See page 23)
18. [LENS CTL] UP/DOWN/LEFT/RIGHT buttons
Press the [LENS CTL] UP/DOWN/LEFT/RIGHT buttons while depressing the CTL (LENS) button to move (lens shift) the
position of the projected image up, down, left and right. (See page 22)
19. CTL (LENS) button
Press the CTL (LENS) button together with the FOCUS +/- button, the ZOOM +/- button, the [LENS CTL] UP/DOWN/LEFT/
RIGHT button and the DOUSER button.
The FOCUS +/-, ZOOM +/- [LENS CTL] UP/DOWN/LEFT/RIGHT and DOUSER buttons do not function when pressed alone.
20. DOUSER button
Press the DOUSER button while depressing the CTL (LENS) button to open and close the douser.

10
 1. What’s in the Box? and the Names of the Projector Parts

1-4. Names on the Remote Control

1. POWER ON button
2 Operate this button to turn on the power to your projector.
1 Press it three seconds or longer.
4 3 When turning on the power to your projector, first set the main
power switch to the main unit to ON, which puts your projector
17
on standby. (See page 19)
7 2. POWER OFF button
6 Operate this button to turn off (standby) the power to your
5 projector. Press it three seconds or longer.
3. Numeric buttons (1 to 0 buttons)
8 Use these buttons to enter alphanumeric characters. (See
9
page 28)
10 11 4. TEST button
• Press this button, and a test pattern will be displayed.
12 Check the test pattern on the LCD screen by pressing the
13
SELECT
/ button, then press ENTER to set your
- - 15 selection.
16 To cancel the test pattern display, reselect the signal to
project.
14
5. KEYSTONE / R button
Press the KEYSTONE(R) button while depressing the CTL
button, then the red (R signal) of the test pattern will be turned
off temporarily. Press this button again while depressing the
CTL button, and the red (R signal) will be projected again.
6. AMPLITUDE / G button
Press the AMPLITUDE (G) button while depressing the CTL button, then the green (G signal) of the test pattern will be
turned off temporarily.
Press this button again while depressing the CTL button, and the green (G signal) will be projected again.
7. ENTRYLIST / B button
Press the ENTRYLIST (B) button while depressing the CTL button, then the blue (B signal) of the test pattern will be turned
off temporarily.
Press this button again while depressing the CTL button, and the blue (B signal) will be projected again.
8. POSI / LENS button
Press the POSI/LENS button while depressing the CTL button, to adjust the position of projected screen (Lens Shift Mode).
(See page 22)
9. PICT / SHUT button
• Press this button to turn off image projection temporarily. Press it again, and the image will be projected again.
• Press the PICT / SHUT button while depressing the CTL button, then the douser sill operate to shut off the light for
projection. The POWER indicator blinks in green while the douser is operating. Press this button again while depressing
the CTL button to cancel the operation of the douser.

NOTE When GPIO Control is set to “Enable”, it is not possible to turn the power on/off and the douser function.

10. MENU button

Operate this button, and menus for various settings and adjustments will be displayed on the LCD screen. (See page 26)

11
 1. What’s in the Box? and the Names of the Projector Parts
11. SELECT 
 buttons
• Press the SELECT
/ button when the menu is displayed, and a menu item can be selected.
• Press the SELECT  button when the menu is displayed, and a submenu will be displayed.
• Press the SELECT  button when the menu is displayed, and a menu one level above will be displayed.
• During character entry, press the SELECT
button while depressing the CTL button, then one character will be deleted.
12. ENTER button
Press the ENTER button, and the displayed menu item is actioned.
13. CANCEL button
Press the CANCEL button to return to the previous menu item.
14. FOCUS +/- buttons
Press the FOCUS +/- button while depressing the CTL button, to make lens focus adjustment. (See page 23)
15. ZOOM +/- buttons
Press the ZOOM +/- button while depressing the CTL button, to make lens zoom adjustment. (See page 23)
16. CTL button
The CTL button is a shift function used to access alternative functions on other buttons.
17. Back light switch
When this is set to [ON], the characters on the remote controller will light up.
• When using the remote control with infrared ray signals
If the remote control device is not operated for 30 seconds after turning “ON” the back light switch, the back light switch
will automatically extinguish itself. Thereafter, it will light again when the remote control buttons are operated.
• When using the remote control connected to the remote control cable
The back light will constantly light when the power to the projector is turned on and when the projector is in standby status.

NOTE • The following buttons cannot be used with this projector:

WHITE BAL., ADJUST PICTURE, IMAGE, INFO., PIXEL., MUTE SOUND, MUTE OSD, HELP, AUTO, UNDO

Inserting the batteries

[1] Remove the battery case cover on the backside of the remote control.
[2] Insert the UM-3 size AA batteries into the case. Be careful of the direction poles on the batteries.
[3] Restore the cover.

NOTE • When replacing the batteries, always purchase two of the same type of UM-3 size AA batteries.

Effective range of the remote control

To operate the remote control using infrared rays, and not using the remote control cable, point the remote control transmission
unit toward the remote control reception unit on the projector. Signals from the remote control can generally be received within
the range shown in the figure below.

[Range of reception in the horizontal direction]

Lens

30° 7m

30° Remote control

Reception unit on projector

(Top view of the projector)

(Note) The effective range depicted in the figure may differ slightly in actual use.

12
 1. What’s in the Box? and the Names of the Projector Parts
Using the remote control cable
Use the remote control cable when there are objects that interrupt or obstruct the space between the remote control reception
unit on the projector and the remote control, or when you are using the remote control beyond its effective range.
Note that the remote control cable is connected first to the remote control, then to the projector head.

Notes for use of the remote control

• Do not drop or handle the remote control in a careless manner.
• Do not allow the remote control to be splashed with water or any other liquid. If the remote control should get wet accidentally,
wipe the liquid off immediately.
• Be sure to use the remote control in a place free from heat or dampness as far as is practicable.
• The remote cable is connected first to the remote control, then to the projector head. The leading end of the remote cable is
the power supply unit, so be careful not to touch the other end of the remote cable to the projector head or other devices
while only the remote cable is connected to the projector.

13
 2.
Installation and
Connection

2-1. Steps for setting up and connecting

Use the following steps for setting up your projector:
• Step 1
Setup the screen and projector. (Contact your dealer to carry out the setup.)
• Step 2
Connect cables to the image input terminals. (See page 15)
Connect cables to the various control terminals. (See page 16)
• Step 3
Connect the power cord. (See page 17)

14
 2. Installation and Connection

2-2. Connecting the image input terminals

Your projector has four image input terminals, namely, the HDSDI A input terminal, the HDSDI B input terminal, the DVI-D A
input terminal, and the DVI-D B input terminal.
• HDSDI A/B input terminal (SDI A/SDI B) ................. Inputs serial digital images from a Video Server or Video source.
• DVI-D A/B input terminal (DVI A/DVI B) .................. Inputs digital RGB signals from a PC.

75Ω coaxial cable DVI-D signal cable

15
 2. Installation and Connection

2-3. Connecting the various control terminal

For control, your projector comes with such ports as the PC control terminal and the Ethernet port (RJ-45).
• PC control terminal (PC CONTROL) .......... Use this terminal when controlling the projector in serial connection from a PC.
• Ethernet port (LAN 1/LAN 2) ...................... Use this port when controlling the projector in LAN connection from a PC.

RS-232C

Ethernet cable

16
 2. Installation and Connection

2-4. Connecting the power cord

After making certain that the main power switch of your projector is OFF, connect the power cord to 100-120VAC or 200-
240VAC three-prong outlet (grounded).

CAUTION
• Please contact your dealer/distributor to perform the wiring for connection of the power cord to your
projector.
• Be sure to ground the equipment to ensure safety.
To avoid electric shocks, request a professional to carry out the grounding.
Be sure to perform earth connection before inserting the power plug into the wall outlet.

MMSS
STATU

100-120 VAC or 200-240 VAC

three-prong outlet

NOTE • In the following instances, do not disconnect the power plug from the outlet. Otherwise, trouble may occur:
• When the fan is running after the power is turned off.
• When using a Flash Memory card or LAN card, the card may be damaged.
• Using the Power Cord Stopper
The Power cord wire stopper is provided on the projector so that the cord cannot be accidentally unplugged
from the AC IN.

1. Lift up the wire stopper. 2. Plug the power cord 3. Lift down the wire stopper to hold
into the AC IN. the power cord.
Wire stopper
For North America
Power cord

For Europe

17
 3.
Projection of Images
(Basic Operation)

3-1. Steps of projecting images

• Step 1
Turn on the power to the projector. (See page 19)
• Step 2
Select the title of input signal. (See page 21)
• Step 3
Adjust the position and size of the projected screen. (See page 22)
• Step 4
Turn off the power to the projector. (See page 24)

18
 3. Projection of Images (Basic Operation)

3-2. Turning your projector on

Preparation: Supply AC power to the projector head.
Please contact your dealer/distributor to connect the power cord.

NOTE • Turn off the main power switch to the projector head when supplying or cutting AC power to the projector.
If power is supplied or cut while the main power switch is turned on, the projector will be damaged.
• Be sure to turn your projector on or off in two steps of operation with the “main power switch” and the “POWER
button” (“POWER ON/OFF button” on the remote control).
• Turning power on (See this page)
[1] Turn the “main power switch” on the projector head to on.
Your projector is set in a standby state.
[2] Press the POWER button (POWER ON button on the remote control) three seconds or longer.
Your projector is turn on.
• Turning power off (See page 24)
[1] Press the POWER button (POWER OFF button on the remote control) three seconds or longer.
Your projector is set in a standby state.
[2] When the fan has stopped running, set the “main power switch” on the projector head to OFF.
Your projector is turned off.

1 Remove the lens cap.

2 Turn the main power switch on the side of your projector head to on.
The POWER indicator lights up orange (standby state).

19
 3. Projection of Images (Basic Operation)
3 Press the POWER button on the control panel of your projector three seconds or longer.
Your projector is turn on, and the screen glows light about 30 seconds later. The POWER indicator of the projector lights
up green.
• When controlling with the remote control, press the POWER ON button three seconds or longer.

NOTE • While your projector is on, be sure to have the lens cap removed from the lens.
Otherwise, the lens cap may get deformed due to a heat buildup.
• In the following instances, the power to your projector cannot be turned on even if you press the POWER
button.
• When the inside temperature is abnormally high. The protective function prevents power from turning on.
Wait some time (until the projector inside cools down) and then turn on the power.
• When the STATUS indicator is blinking without the lamp lighting up after power-on. Your projector may be
in trouble. Check the error display on the LCD screen and contact your dealer/distributor for instructions.
• Note that the image may sometimes flicker until the lamp has stabilized (5 to 10 minutes) after power-on. This
is due to the characteristics of the lamp and is not trouble of your projector.

20
 3. Projection of Images (Basic Operation)

3-3. Selecting the title of input signal

This projector allows you to select pre-registered signals using the signal selection buttons on the control panel (up to 8
signals). Request your dealer/distributor for details on registering and changing titles. This section explains the steps for
selecting registered signals.

1 Turn on the power to the image devices connected to the projector.

2 Press the MENU button.

3 Press the [MENU CTL] LEFT/RIGHT button to display “Title Select” on the LCD screen.
At each press of the [MENU CTL] LEFT/RIGHT buttons, the display will cycle as “Title Select” ←→ “Configuration” ←→
“(Title Setup)” ←→ “Information.”

4 Press the [MENU CTL] DOWN button.

The title of the input signal is displayed.
• When you have made a wrong selection, press the [MENU CTL] UP button. A return will be made to the previous
menu.

5 Press the [MENU CTL] LEFT/RIGHT buttons to display “Title of Signal to be Projected” on the LCD
screen.

6 Press the ENTER button.

The title of the signal to be projected is selected.
• The (*) mark on the LCD indicates that this is the currently selected item.

21
 3. Projection of Images (Basic Operation)

3-4. Adjusting the position and the size of projected screen

3-4-1. Displaying the test pattern
1 Press the TEST button on the remote control. Alternatively, select the test pattern from the signal
selection button.
If you register the test patterns to the signal selection buttons (<1> to <8> buttons), select the test pattern according to
“3-3. Selecting the title of input signal (See page 21)”.
The mode for selecting the test pattern is set.

2 Press the SELECT
/ button.

The display of the test pattern name on the LCD switches.

3 Display on the LCD the name of the test pattern to be projected, then press the ENTER button.
The test pattern is displayed.
• To cancel the test pattern display, reselect the signal to be project.

3-4-2. Adjusting the position of the projected screen (Lens shift)

1 Press the [LENS CTL] UP/DOWN/LEFT/RIGHT buttons while depressing the CTL button, on the
control panel of your projector as required.
The position of the projected screen will move upward, downward, left or right.
• When controlling with the remote control, press the POSI/LENS button while depressing the CTL (LENS) button.

22
 3. Projection of Images (Basic Operation)

3-4-3. Fine adjustment of the size of the projected screen (Zoom)

1 Press the ZOOM +/- buttons while depressing the CTL (LENS) button on the control panel of your
projector as required.
• When controlling with the remote control, press the ZOOM +/- button while depressing the CTL (LENS) button.

3-4-4. Focusing the projected screen (Focus)

1 Press the FOCUS +/- buttons while depressing the CTL (LENS) button, on the control panel of
your projector as required.
• When controlling with the remote control, press the FOCUS +/- button while depressing the CTL (LENS) button.

3-4-5. Adjusting the brightness of the projected screen (Lamp output)

1 Press the LAMP +/- buttons while depressing the CTL (LAMP) button, on the control panel of your
projector as required.

23
 3. Projection of Images (Basic Operation)

3-5. Turning your projector off

1 Press the POWER button on the projector control panel for three seconds or longer.
The power to the projector is turned off. The POWER indicator will blink in orange (cooling state).
The fan will continue to rotate while cooling, and the amount of time remaining for cooling is displayed on the LCD
screen. The cooling-off time is 3 minutes.
When cooling has ended, the POWER indicator lights in orange (Standby).
• When controlling with the remote control, press the POWER OFF button for three seconds or longer.

2 When the projector has entered the standby state, turn the main power switch on the projector
head to off.
The projector POWER indicator will extinguish and the main power will turn off.

3 Turn off the AC power to the projector head.

NOTE • In the following instances, do not turn off the main power switch or disconnect the AC power. Doing so can
damage the projector.
• While projecting images
• While the fan is running after the power is turned off (The cooling-off time is 3 minutes)

24
 4.
Using Menus

4-1. Basic operation with adjustment menus

To adjust the projector, display the menu on the LCD screen of the projector control panel.
4-1-1. Screen display
The menu display screen is composed of a menu display field (the upper two lines) and a setting item display field (the bottom
two lines).

← Displays the main menu or submenus.

← Displays submenus or selection items.
← Displays settings and selection status.
← Displays settings, selected items and information on selected menus.

The meanings of symbols in the menu display screen are outlined below.

Indicates that there is a menu of a higher level.

Press the [MENU CTL] UP button to return to a menu one level above.
Indicates that there is a selected item or menu at the same level.
Press the [MENU CTL] LEFT/RIGHT button to display other selected items or menus.
Indicates that there is a menu of a lower level.
Press the [MENU CTL] DOWN button to display the menu one level below.
Indicates that there are setting items of a lower level.
Press the [MENU CTL] UP button to return to a menu one level above.
Press the [MENU CTL] DOWN button to display the setting item one level below.

25
 4. Using Menus
When not displaying menus, the following screen is normally displayed.

When in standby
When the projector is in a standby state (the main power switch in on), the following is displayed.

When power is turned on

When the power is turned on, the following is displayed.

← Displays the hours of lamp bulb use.

← Displays the lamp output (%).
← Displays the selected title.
← Displays the selected port.

When the power is turned off

The amount of time remaining for cooling is displayed as shown below, when the power to the projector head is turned off.

4-1-2. Operating menus

Preparation: Turn your projector on. (See page 19)

1 Press the MENU button on the control panel of your projector .

The menu is displayed in the LCD screen.

2 Press the [MENU CTL] LEFT/RIGHT buttons to display “Information.”

At each press of the [MENU CTL] LEFT/RIGHT buttons, the display yp l cycle as “Title Select” ←→ “Configuration” ←→
“(Title Setup)” ←→ “Information.”

26
 4. Using Menus
3 Press the [MENU CTL] DOWN button.
The submenu “Lamp” of “Information” is displayed.
The menu item can be selected by pressing the ENTER button instead of the SELECT DOWN button
To return to the previous state, press the [MENU CTL] UP button, or the CANCEL button.

4 Press the [MENU CTL] LEFT/RIGHT button to select the submenu “Version.”
At each press of the [MENU CTL] LEFT/RIGHT button, the display will cycle as “Lamp” ←→ “Macro Key” ←→ “Usage”
←→ “Error Code” ←→ “Version” ←→ “IP Address” ←→ “MMS Status.”

5 Press the [MENU CTL] DOWN button.

The submenu “BIOS” another rank lower than “System” is displayed.

6 Press the [MENU CTL] LEFT/RIGHT button to select the submenu “Data.”
At each press of the [MENU CTL] LEFT/RIGHT button, the display will cycle as “BIOS” ←→ “Firmware” ←→ “Data” ←→
“Serial No.,” and each version information is displayed.

7 Press the [MENU CTL] UP button several times.

At each press of the [MENU CTL] UP button, the display will return to a menu one level above.

27
 4. Using Menus

4-1-3. How to enter alphanumeric characters

Alphanumeric characters are entered for items, such as the title of input signal.
With this projector, the characters are inputted by pressing numeric buttons on the remote control.

Numeric buttons

By pressing the numeric buttons, the characters can be inputted as shown in the table below.
• To delete a character during entry, press the SELECT
button while depressing the CTL button.

[Example of Entry] Numeric

Press directly While depressing CTL button
To enter “XGA” for example, use the following procedure: button
(1) Press the 8 button three times. A→B→C→1→ a→b→c→!→
V→W→X 1
(2) Press the SELECT  button.
D→E→F→2→ d→e→f→î→
(3) Press the “3” button. 2
XG
(4) Press the SELECT  button. G→H→I→3→ g→h→i→#→
3
(5) Press the “1” button.
XGA J→K→L→4→ j→k→l→$→
4

M→N→O→5→ m→n→o→%→
5

P→Q→R→6→ p→q→r→&→
6

S→T→U→7→ s→t→u→í→
7

V→W→X→8→ v→w→x→(→
8

Y→Z→/→9→ y→z→?→)→
9

*→.→.→0→ ;→:→+→_→
0

NOTE • To input characters using the remote control, only numbers can be entered with [password] and the security
[keyword].

28
 4. Using Menus

4-2. Table of adjustment menus

Menus in parentheses are menus for our service personnel. Normally, these menus cannot be used.

Reference
Main menu Submenu Description
page
Title Select "Title Memory Name" Selects the title of the signal to be projected. 30
TEST Pattern Selects the test pattern to be projected. 30
Configuration Lamp Setup Adjust Adjusts lamp brightness. 31
Feedback Sets the lamp brightness constant mode that uses a 31
brightness sensor.
(Setup) Douser Mode Selects whether to use the douser (screen mute) when -
switching signals.
Ext. MMS Link Sets whether to connect the multi-media switcher (MMS). -
Panel Key Lock Locks the buttons on the projector's control panel so that -
they cannot be operated.
GPIO Port Selects the target of GPIO port control. -
FactoryDefault Returns the settings to their default values (only macro keys -
and titles, or all settings).
(Installation) Image Orient Selects the projection method (desktop front / desktop rear / -
ceiling front / ceiling rear).
Lens Center Moves the lens shift position to the center. -
MMS Select Selects the multi-media switcher (MMS) to connect. -
Baudrate Sets the PC control connector (RS-232C) data transmission -
speed (bps).
Date/Time Sets the date and time on the projector. -
Bulb Alignment Sets the lamp bulb alignment. -
(Memory) Lamp Saves the current lamp setting. -
Lens Saves the current lens setting. -
(Title Setup) Macro Key Macro Key No.1-8 Sets the titles to be assigned to the macro keys of 1 to 8. 31
Information Lamp Output Displays the lamp output setting. 32
Macro Key Macro Key No.1-8 Displays the titles assigned to the macro keys of 1 to 8. 32
Usage Displays the usage times of the projector, lamp bulb, lamp 32
house and bulb warning.
Error Code Displays the currently occurring error. 32
Version Displays the version of the projector head. (BIOS, Firmware, 33
Data, and Serial No.)
IP Address System Displays the SYSTEM IP address. 33
Cinema Displays the CINEMA IP address. 33
MMS Status Displays the link-status of the connected multi-media 33
switcher (MMS).

29
 4. Using Menus

4-3. Title Select

4-3-1. Title select (Title Memory)
Selects the title of the signal to be projected.
You can register up to 100 titles. You can also assign registered titles to the Macro keys of 1 to 8 on the projector’s control panel
and call them up directly using those buttons.
Request your dealer/distributor for details on registering and changing titles.

← Displays the currently selected item with asterisk (*).

← Selects the title to be projected.

4-3-2. Test Pattern

Selects the test pattern to be projected.

← Displays the currently selected item with asterisk (*).

← Selects the test pattern to be projected.

OFF, Alignment, Cross Hatch, Convergence, Red, Green, Blue, White, Black, White 50% [IRE], H-Ramp, Logo

30
 4. Using Menus

4-4. Configuration
Please request your dealer/distributor to perform the settings.

4-4-1. Lamp Setup

Adjust
Adjusts the lamp output (brightness). Control the output at 30 to 34 W increments.

← Displays the lamp output (%) with regard to the setting.

← Adjusts the lamp brightness.

Feedback
Sets the lamp brightness constant mode that uses a brightness sensor.

← Displays the currently selected item with asterisk (*).

← Displays the setting.

Disable Disables the lamp brightness constant mode.

Enable Enables the lamp brightness constant mode.

4-5. Title Setup

Sets the titles to be assigned to the macro keys.
Request your dealer/distributor to perform the settings.

31
 4. Using Menus

4-6. Information
Displays the hours of lamp bulb use, the version information and error codes.

4-6-1. Lamp
Displays information relating to the lamp. (Such as lamp output and the utilization time of lamp bulb.)

Output
Displays the lamp brightness (output) setting.

← Displays the power consumption (W).

4-6-2. Macro Key

Displays the titles assigned to the macro keys of 1 to 8 on the projector’s control panel.

← Selects the macro key number whose contents you want to display.

← Displays the registered names of the assigned titles.

4-6-3. Usage
Projector and lamp bulb utilization times and the remaining usable time for the lamp bulb are displayed.

← Selects the item to display.

← Displays the hours of use (H).

Projector Displays the hours of projector head use.

Bulb Displays the utilization time of the currently used lamp bulb (Lamp utilization time).
Remainig Time Displays the remaining usable time for the lamp bulb.

4-6-4. Error Code

Displays the error code when an error occurs. See the “Error Code List” in the Appendix for details on error codes.

← Displays the code of the error currently occurring.

← Displays the name of the error currently occurring.

When multiple errors occur, you can display them by pressing the [MENU CTL] LEFT/RIGHT buttons.

32
 4. Using Menus

4-6-5. Version
Displays the versions of the projector head.

← Selects the item to display.

← Displays the version information.

BIOS Displays the BIOS version of the projector head.

Firmware Displays the firmware version of the projector head.
Data Displays the data version of the projector head.
Serial No. Displays the serial number of the projector head.

4-6-6. IP Address
Displays the IP address set in the projector head.

← Selects the item to display the IP address.

← Displays the IP address.

System Displays the IP address set for the projector head (System).
Cinema Displays the IP address set for the projector head (Cinema).

4-6-7. MMS Status

Indicates the link-status of the multi-media switcher (MMS) connected to your projector.

← Displays the status information of MMS linked operations.

← Displays the IP address.

External External multi-media switcher (MMS) is linked.

Not Use There is no link established.

33
 5.
Maintenance of Your
Projector

NOTE Please request your dealer to perform lamp replacement, filter replacement and cleaning of the projector inside.

5-1. Cleaning the Cabinet

Be sure to always check that the AC power supply of the projector head is disconnected before carrying out maintenance of
your projector.
• Wipe with a dry, soft cloth without nap.
When the cabinet is excessively dirty, wipe with cloth well wrung after being dampened with a neutral detergent diluted with
water and then finish up with a dry cloth.
When you use a chemical dust cloth, follow the instructions in the manual attached to it.
• Do not use a solvent, such as thinner or benzene. The coating may deteriorate or peel off.
• When removing dust on the ventilation opening, suck it off using an adapter with a brush on a vacuum cleaner. Never allow
the cleaner without an adapter to come into direct contact or use a nozzles adapter in cleaning.
• Clean the ventilation opening at regular intervals. Dust, if allowed to accumulate there, may cause heating inside, which
leads to functional trouble. The interval, which can vary with the location of your projector, is about 100 hours.
• Do not damage the cabinet by scratching it or allowing hard objects to hit it. This can scratch the projector.
• Consult your dealer/distributor about cleaning the inside of the projector.

NOTE Do not allow insecticide or other volatile liquid to splash on the cabinet, lens or screen. Also, do not allow any
rubber or plastic object to remain in contact with the cabinet for a long time. The coating may deteriorate or
peel off.

5-2. Cleaning the Lens

Clean the lens the same way as with camera lens (using a commercially available camera blower or cleaning paper for
glasses). Take care not to damage the lens when cleaning.

34
 6.
Appendix
6-1. Troubleshooting
Before asking for repair, please check your connection, settings and operation once again. If the trouble cannot be corrected,
please contact your dealer/distributor for instructions or repair.
6-1-1. Problems and where to check
Problem
The projector cannot be turned on.
The image cannot be projected.
The image is distorted.
The image is blurred.
Video image is disturbed
Check these items
Check to see if the power plug is properly connected to the outlet.
Make certain that the main power switch is ON.
Check to see whether the panel key lock function is activated. If so, the main unit's control buttons
are locked and do not work, but the projector can be controlled using the remote control unit.
Is the temperature inside the projector too high? When the inside temperature is too high, the
protective function does not allow your projector to be turned on. Wait some time and then turn it on.
Check to see if the connected input has been selected.
Check to see if a cable is properly connected to the input terminal.
Check to see whether the douser is closed.
Check to see if the settings are all adjusted properly.
Check to see if the protractor is properly set up.
Make certain that the lens is properly focused.
Check to see if the screen and a projector are installed at correct angles.
The projection distance may be larger than the focusing range.
See if the lens and other parts have condensation on them. If the projector is turned on in a
warm place after storage in a cold place, the lens and other optical components inside may
develop condensation. In such a case, please wait several minutes until the comdensation
disappears.
Check whether the signal cable connected to the projector is disconnected.
35
 6. Appendix
Problem
The projector cannot be operated
with the remote control.
The STATUS indicator blinks in red.
An error code is displayed.
36
Check these items
Make sure the remote control transmission unit is facing the light reception unit on the projector.
Check whether the batteries are still good. Replace with new batteries.
Check whether there is any obstructing object between the remote control and the light
reception unit on the projector.
Check whether you are outside of the remote control's effective range (7m).
Check whether the remote control cable has become disconnected, if you are using the remote
control by connecting with the remote control cable.
Your projector may have trouble. Please contact your dealer/distributor for instructions.
See the "Error Code List" (page 38).
 6. Appendix

6-2. Indicator display list

See the descriptions below when the blinking or lighting of the two indicators on the projector’s control panel is observed.

MMS STATUS indicator

MMS
STATUS

POWER indicator
STATUS indicator

6-2-1. POWER indicator

Indicator condition Projector condition Note
Off The main power is off. -
Blinking light Green The projector is getting ready to turn on. Wait for a moment.
The douser is closed.
Orange The projector is cooling down. Wait for a moment.
Steady light Green The projector is turned on. -
Orange The projector is in standby. -

6-2-2. STATUS indicator

Indicator condition Projector condition Note
Off Normal. -
Blinking light Red When an error has occurred. An error message is displayed in
the LCD screen.
Check the content of the error.

6-2-3. MMS STATUS indicator

Indicator condition Projector condition Note
Off Multi-media switcher (MMS) not in use. -
Blinking light Red Link error Link error. An error message is
displayed in the LCD screen.
Check the content of the error.
Orange Preparing link with Multi-media switcher (MMS). Wait for a moment
Steady light Orange Multi-media switcher (MMS) is linked. -

37
 6. Appendix

6-3. Error code list

Please inquire your dealer/distributor about action to be taken for each error code.
Description is omitted for error codes 20 to 92.

Error code Error message Desctiption

1 Lamp Cover Open Lamp cover is open.
2 Over Temp Lamp Temperature (lamp temperature) is abnoramal.
3 Fan Stop DC fan stop.
4 GPSU Fail Power supply is abnormal.
5 Lamp Unlit Lamp doesn’t light up.
8 Over Temp. LPSU Temperature (in lamp power supply) is abnormal.
9 Over Temp. In Temperature (inside of projector) is abnormal.
10 DLP PGOOD Fail Engine power is abnormal.
11 DLP Comm. Fail Cinema engine communication error.
12 E2PROM R Fail E2PROM data read error is detected.
15 E2PROM W Fail E2PROM data write error is detected.
16 Fan Stop Lamp Stop of lamp cooling fan.
17 Pump Stop Stopped for pump error.
18 Over Temp. DMD DMD temperature error alarm.
19 E2PROM D Fail E2PROM data failure.
20 System Fail -
21 Self Test Fail -
22 ARM Fail -
23 DSP Fail -
24 Interface FPGA Fail -
25 Processor FPGA Fail -
30 IB Diag Not Performed -
31 IB FPGA Code Invalid -
32 IB FPGA INITZ Fail -
33 IB FPGA No-Load Set -
34 IB FPGA DONE Fail -
35 IB FPGA Reg R/W Fail -
36 IB Framestore Test Fail -
37 IB ANC FIFO Test Fail -
38 IB RTC Serial # Fail -
39 IB UART0 Fail -
40 IB UART1 Fail -
41 IB IIC Fail -
42 IB Ethernet Fail -
43 IB Sync-Serial Fail -
44 IB File System Fail -
45 IB Formatter Fail -
46 IB Flash Protect Fail -
47 IB GPI Macro Fail -
48 IB A/D Macro Fail -
60 PB Diag Not Performed -
61 PB FPGA Code Invalid -
62 PB FPGA INITZ Fail -

38
 6. Appendix
Error code Error message Desctiption
63 PB McBSP XRDY Fail -
64 PB FPGA Done Fail -
65 PB FPGA Reg R/W Fail -
66 PB Serial-ID Chip Fail -
67 PB CLUT-SRAM Fail -
68 PB OvFS-SDRAM Fail -
69 PB Resizer FIR Fail -
70 PB Resizer FIFO Fail -
71 PB Other Fail -
90 FB Red RDRAM Signature Fail -
91 FB Green RDRAM Signature Fail -
92 FB Blue RDRAM Signature Fail -
120 DLP Ack Fail Cinema block communication ACK error.
123 OverTime Bulb Lamp bulb cumulative time is over.
130 MMS Comm. Fail Multimedia switcher (MMS) link operation failure.

39
 6. Appendix

6-4. Operation using an HTTP browser

6-4-1. Overview
The use of HTTP server functions will allow control of the projector from a web browser. Please be sure to use “ Microsoft
Internet Explorer 4.x” or a higher version for the web browser.
This device uses “JavaScript” and “Cookies” and the browser should be set to accept these functions. The setting method will
vary depending on the version of the browser. Please refer to the help files and the other information provided in your software.

NOTE The display’s or button’s response can be slowed down or operation may not be accepted depending on the
settings of your network.
Should this happen, consult your network administrator.
The projector may not respond if its buttons are repeatedly pressed in rapid intervals. Should this happen, wait
a moment and repeat. If you still cannot get any response, pull out and then reinsert the LAN card on the
projector.
Access is gained to the HTTP server functions by and specifying
http://<the projector’s IP address>/index.html
in the entry column of the URL.

6-4-2. Preparation before use

Make network connections and set up the projector and confirm that it is complete before engaging in browser operations.
Operations with a browser that uses a proxy server may not be possible depending on the type of proxy server and the setting
method. Although the type of proxy server will be a factor, it is possible that items that have actually been set will not be
displayed depending on the effectiveness of the cache, and the contents set from a browser not be reflected in operation. It is
recommended that a proxy server not be used unless it is unavoidable.

6-4-3. Handling of the address for operation via a browser

Regarding the actual address that is entered for the address or entered to the URL column when operation of the projector is
via a browser, the host name can be used as it is with the host name corresponding to the IP address of the projector has been
registered in the domain name server by a network administrator, or the host name corresponding to the IP address of the
projector has been set in the “HOSTS” file of the computer being used.

(Example 1) When the host name of the projector has been set to “pj.nec.co.jp”
http://pj.nec.co.jp/index.html is specified for the address or the entry column of the URL to access HTTP server functions.

(Example 2) When the IP address of the projector is “192.168.10.10”

http://192.168.10.10/index.html is specified for the address or the entry column of the URL to access HTTP server
functions.

40
 6. Appendix

6-4-4. Structure of the HTTP server

Power Controls the power to your projector.

• On: Turns the power on.
• Off: Turns the power off.
Title List Displays titles set in the projector (such as input port, screen type, and title).
Check, and the title will be changed.
Basic Control Displays the basic control items.
Lens Controls the lens operation.
Shift  : Shifts the projected screen upward.
 : Shifts the projected screen downward.

: Shifts the projected screen leftward.
 : Shifts the projected screen rightward.
: Stops the shifting.
Shifting can also be stopped by clicking the same button one more time.
Zoom  : Zooms up the lens.
 : Zooms down the lens.
: Stops the zooming.
Zooming the can also be stopped by clicking the same button one more time.
Focus  : Focuses up the lens.
 : Focuses down the lens.
: Stops the focusing.
Focusing can also be stopped by clicking the same button one more time.
Mute Picture Click and the douser closes and the projected picture disappears. Click once again and the
picture will be projected again.
Projector Status Displays the condition of the projector.
• Port: Displays the input port of the selected title.
• Lamp Usage: Displays the hours of lamp use.
• Lamp Power: Displays lamp output (%).
• Error Status: Displays the status of errors occurring within the projector.
• Refresh: Updates the display of the following conditions.

41
 6. Appendix

6-5. Outline Drawing

Units: mm (inch)

42
 6. Appendix

6-6. Specifications

Model No. NC800C

Projection method 3 chip DMD reflector method (DLP® method)
Panel resolution 2048 x 1080
Lamp type 1.25 kW xenon lamp
Screen sizes 8 m (Width) (Depends on setup conditions)
Contrast ratio 200:1 or above
Lens adjustment function Motorized lens shift (vertical/horizontal), motorized zoom, motorized focus, douser
Signal input terminal RGB DIGITAL (2) DVI-D 24pin（TMDS specification）
SDI (2) BNC（SMPTE 292M）
External Control RS232C (1) D-sub 9 pin
Remote control
LAN port (RJ-45) x 2
USB port (type A)
GPIO port (D-sub 37 pin)
PC card slot (1) PCMCIA type II, card bus
LAN port for the Touch Panel (Note)
Power supply voltage AC100 to 120V 50/60Hz,
AC200 to 240V 50/60Hz
Input current 12A (100 - 120V), 8.5A (200 - 240V)
Power consumption 1.2kW to 1.44kW (100 - 120V), 1.7kW (200 - 240V)
Cooling method Cooling air system (includes dust filter)
Noise level Less than 45dB (When set to minimum brightness mode)
Installation Orientation: Desktop/front, Desktop/rear, Ceiling/front, Ceiling/rear
Dimensions 670mm(W) x 826mm(D) x 423mm(H) (Does not include protruding portions Includes foot)
Net weight 66 kg (Excluding lens)
Environment Operating temperature: 5 to 35˚C
Operating humidity: 10 to 85% (non-condensing)
Storage temperature: -10 to 50˚C
Storage humidity: 10 to 85% (non-condensing)
Regulations <Safety> <EMC>
USA UL60950-1 FCC Class A
Canada CSA60950-1 ICES-003 Class A
Europe EN60950-1 EN55022 Class A
EN55024
Oceania IEC60950-1
AS/NZS CISPR. 22 Class A
Japan J60950 VCCI Class A
Asia IEC60950-1 CISPR. 22

(Note) This is the terminal for future expansions.

* Note that these specifications and design can change without prior notice.

43
 6. Appendix

Caracteristiques techniques
Numéro du modèle NC800C
Mode de projection Réflecteur DMD 3 matrices (DLP ® method)
Résolution du panneau 2048 x 1080
Type de lampe Lampe xenon 1.25kW
Tailles d'écran 8m (Largeur) (Dépend des conditions de configuration)
Rapport de contraste Plus de 200 : 1
Fonction de réglage de l'objectif Commande du mouvement horizontal et vertical de l’objectif à moteur, Commande
du zoom et de la mise au point à moteur, obturateur
Borne d'entrée des signaux RGB NUMERIQUE (2) DVI-D 24fiches (Spécifications TMDS)
SDI (2) BNC (SMPTE 292M Niveau C, 4:2:2)
Commande extérieure D-sub 9 fiches RS232C (1)
Télécommande
Port Ethernet (2) (RJ-45)
Port USB (Type A)
Port GPIO (D-sub 37 broches)
Slot de carte PC (1) PCMCIA type II, bus de carte
Port Ethernet pour le Toucher Panneau (Remarque)
Alimentation électrique CA100-120V 50/60 Hz,
CA200-240V 50/60 Hz
Intensité d’entrée 12A(100-120V), 8.5A(200-240V)
Puissance absorbée 1.2kW to 1.44kW(100-120V), 1.7kW(200-240V)
Mode de refroidissement Système de refroidissement par air (comprend un filtre anti-poussière)
Niveau de bruit Moins de 45dB (Lorsque réglé en mode de luminosité minimum)
Installation Bureau/Avant, Bureau/Arrière, Plafond/Avant, Plafond/Arrière
Dimensions 670mm(l) x 826mm(p) x 423mm(h) (Ne comprend pas les parties saillantes
Comprend le pied)
Poids net 66kg (sans objectif)
Environnement Température de service : 5° à 35°C,
Humidité : 10-85% (sans condensation)
Température de magasinage: -10° à 50°C
Humidité : 10-85% (sans condensation)
Réglementations <Sécurité> <EMC>
USA UL60950-1 FCC Classe A
Canada CSA60950-1 ICES-003 Classe A
Europe EN60950-1 EN55022 Classe A
EN55024
Océanie IEC60950-1
AS/NZS CISPR. 22 Classe A
Japon J60950 VCCI Classe A
Asie IEC60950-1 CISPR. 22

(Remarque) C’est la borne pour de futures expansions.

* Veuillez noter que l’apparence et les caractéristiques peuvent être modifiées sans avertissement préalable.

44
 6. Appendix

Technische Daten
Modellnummer NC800C
Projektionsverfahren 3 Chip DMD-Reflektorverfahren (DLP ®-Verfahren)
Bildflächenauflösung 2048 x 1080
Lampentyp 1.25kW Xenon-Lampe
Bildschirmgrößen 8m (Breite) (Ist abhängig von den Einrichtungsbedingungen)
Kontrastverhältnis Mehr als 200 : 1
Linsenbewegung Servo in Horizontal- und Vertikalrichtung, Motorzoom und -fokus, Douser
Signaleingangsanschluss RGB DIGITAL (2) DVI-D 24-pol (TMDS-Spezifikation)
SDI (2) BNC (SMPTE 292M Level C, 4:2:2)
Externe Steuerung RS232C (1) D-sub 9-pol
Fernbedienung
Ethernet Port (2) (RJ-45)
USB Port (Typ A)
GPIO Port (D-Sub 37-pol.)
PC-Kartensteckplatz (1) PCMCIA Typ II, Karten-Bus
Ethernet Port für das Fingerspitzentablett (Hinweis)
Spannungsversorgung 100-120V Wechselstrom 50/60Hz,
200-240V Wechselstrom 50/60Hz
Eingangsstrom 12A(100-120V), 8.5A(200-240V)
Leistungsaufnahme 1.2kW to 1.44kW(100-120V), 1.7kW(200-240V)
Abkühlverfahren Luftabkühlsystem (einschließlich Staubfilter)
Geräuschpegel Weniger als 45dB (Wenn es auf minimale Belichtung eingestellt ist)
Installation Ausrichtung: Desktop/Vorn, Desktop/Hinten, Decke/Vorn, Decke/Hinten
Abmessungen (B/T/H) 670mm(B) x 826mm(T) x 423mm(H) (Ohne hervorstehende Teile, einschließlich Fuß)
Gewicht 66kg (ohne Linse)
Umgebungsbedingungen Betriebstemperatur: 5°C bis 35°C
Feuchtigkeit: 10-85% ohne Kondensatbildung
Lagerungstemperatur: -10°C bis 50°C
Feuchtigkeit : 10-85% ohne Kondensatbildung
Verordnungen <Sicherheit> <EMC>
USA UL60950-1 FCC Klasse A
Kanada CSA60950-1 ICES-003 Klasse A
Europa EN60950-1 EN55022 Klasse A
EN55024
Ozeanien IEC60950-1
AS/NZS CISPR. 22 Klasse A
Japan J60950-1 VCCI Klasse A
Asien IEC60950-1 CISPR. 22

(Hinweis) Dieses ist der Anschluß für zukünftige Expansionen.

* Beachten Sie, dass Änderungen der technischen Daten und des Designs jederzeit vorbehalten sind.

45
 6. Appendix

6-7. Pin Assignment and Functions of Terminal

6-7-1. PC CONTROL connector (D-Sub 9 pin)
This is an RS-232C interface for controlling the projector head from a PC. The projector operates as a DCE (Data Communication
Equipment), so use a straight cable when connecting to a PC.

6 7 8 9
Pin RS-232C
Functions as RS-232C Projector Connector Operation
1 2 3 4 5 No. Signal Name
1 CD Carrier detection Not used (N.C.)
2 RXD Reception data Data transmission to an external device
3 TXD Transmission data Data reception from an external device
4 DTR Data Terminal ready (Note 1) Connection to 6 pins
5 GND Signal GND Signal GND
6 DSR Data set ready (Note 1) Connection to 4 pins
7 RTS Transmission request SYSTEM (Note 2): Hi-Z (Not used)
CINEMA (Note 2): Hi-Z (Used)
8 CTS Transmission available SYSTEM (Note 2): Fixed at -6.5 V (Not used)
CINEMA (Note 2): ± 10.5 V (Used: Depends
on communication status)
9 RI Ring indicator Not used (N.C.)

Note 1: Do not use DTR and DSR signals when communicating.

Note 2: Connector operations vary according to the PC control signal switch
(CINEMA/SYSTEM). (When in SYSTEM, do not use RTS and CTS signals.)

Internal Configuration Diagram of RS-232C Communication System

Projector NC800C
PC Control Signal Switch

CINEMA
SYSTEM
Cinema
Control Block

PC
RS-232C
Connector
System
Control Block

46
 6. Appendix

6-7-2. Remote control input connector (REMOTE IN) (Stereo mini)

Connected with the projector’s remote control the accessory remote cable.
When the remote cable is connected to this connector, the remote cable connector operates with the following functions.

DC power supply unit for remote control

Remote signal unit

GND unit

The DC voltage supplied from the projector to the remote control is approximately +4.0 V.

NOTE The remote control cable is connected first to the remote control, then to the projector head.
The leading end of the remote control cable is the power supply unit, so be careful not to touch the other end
of the remote cable to the projector head or other devices while only the remote control cable is connected to
the projector.

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
TIP
Even if the remote cable power supply unit and GND unit (such as the projector head) should short, the
protective function inside the projector will activate to prevent the shorted cable from damaging the projector.
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

6-7-3. LAN port (LAN-A, LAN-B) (RJ-45)

Use Ethernet 10Base-T/100Base-TX UTP (Unshielded Twist Pair cable) to connect with a video server or a PC.
A switching hub exists inside, so there are no functional differences of either the LAN-A or LAN-B ports.

Internal Configuration Diagram of LAN Port

Projector NC800C

Cinema
• Video Server
LAN-C
Control
• PC
LAN-A
Block
Ethernet
LAN-B Switching
Hub
• Video Server System
LAN-D
• PC Control
Block

47
 6. Appendix

6-7-4. External control connector (GP I/O) (D-Sub 37 pin)

It is possible to control the projector with an external device and to control the external device from the projector using an
external control connector (GP I/O: General Purpose I/O Ports). Each pin is electrically separated from the projector internal
circuits by a photo-coupler. 8 port input and 8 port output are available.
Please contact your dealer/distributor regarding how to use and to operate them.

19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

37 36 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 Pin view of female connector

Pin No. Signal Name I/O Pin No. Signal Name I/O
1 Ext_GPIN_1_P Input 20 Ext_GPIN_1_N Input
2 Ext_GPIN_2_P Input 21 Ext_GPIN_2_N Input
3 Ext_GPIN_3_P Input 22 Ext_GPIN_3_N Input
4 Ext_GPIN_4_P Input 23 Ext_GPIN_4_N Input
5 Ext_GPIN_5_P Input 24 Ext_GPIN_5_N Input
6 Ext_GPIN_6_P Input 25 Ext_GPIN_6_N Input
7 Ext_GPIN_7_P Input 26 Ext_GPIN_7_N Input
8 Ext_GPIN_8_P Input 27 Ext_GPIN_8_N Input
9 Ext_GPOUT_1_P Output 28 Ext_GPOUT_1_N Output
10 Ext_GPOUT_2_P Output 29 Ext_GPOUT_2_N Output
11 Ext_GPOUT_3_P Output 30 Ext_GPOUT_3_N Output
12 Ext_GPOUT_4_P Output 31 Ext_GPOUT_4_N Output
13 Ext_GPOUT_5_P Output 32 Ext_GPOUT_5_N Output
14 Ext_GPOUT_6_P Output 33 Ext_GPOUT_6_N Output
15 Ext_GPOUT_7_P Output 34 Ext_GPOUT_7_N Output
16 Ext_PROJ_GOOD_P Output 35 Ext_PROJ_GOOD_N Output
17 NC - 36 NC -
18 Reserve - 37 Reserve -
19 Reserve - - - -

48
 6. Appendix
Input Connector

GP I/O Connector Inside Projector

Resist = 390 Ω
Ext_GPIN_P
Pin No.: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Voltage applied across the pins of Ext_GPIN_P and

Ext_GPIN_N should be in the range from 3.3 Vdc to 10 Vdc.
Recommended Operating Current: 5mA
Absolute Maximum Rating: 23mA

Ext_GPIN_N
Pin No.: 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 Photo-coupler
Forward direction voltage: 1.1 V (@5 mA)

• Use with External Control Mode

You can use the GP I/O input port to turn the projector power on and off, to control video mute and to switch signals (switching
the input connector and image adjusting data).

Pin No. Photo-coupler ON / OFF Function

1-20 OFF External control mode OFF
ON External control mode ON
2-21 OFF Power off
ON Power on
3-22 OFF Image mute off
ON Image mute on
4-23 6-25 5-24 4-23 The following functions are used, depending on the combination of the input connectors.
5-24 OFF OFF OFF Selects title registered to MACRO 1.
6-25 OFF OFF ON Selects title registered to MACRO 2.
OFF ON OFF Selects title registered to MACRO 3.
OFF ON ON Selects title registered to MACRO 4.
ON OFF OFF Selects title registered to MACRO 5.
ON OFF ON Selects title registered to MACRO 6.
ON ON OFF Selects title registered to MACRO 7.
ON ON ON Selects title registered to MACRO 8.
7-26 - - - Used internally.
8-27 - - - Used internally.

NOTE When in use in the External Control Mode, it is not possible to turn the power on and off from the remote
control, operation panel or menus, to mute the video, or to switch titles.

Output Connector

GP I/O Connector Inside Projector

Ext_GPOUT_P
Ext_PROJ_GOOD_P
Pin No.: 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

Absolute Maximum Rating: 50 mA

Ext_GPOUT_N
Ext_PROJ_GOOD_N
Pin No.: 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 Photo-coupler

49
 6. Appendix

6-7-5. SDI-A, SDI-B (HD-SDI input connector) (BNC)

This is a signal input connector (SMPTE 292/HDSDI) for CINEMA.
The SMPTE 292/HD-SDI transfers HDTV signals with 1.5 GHz digital serial signals, so use a 75 É∂ coaxial cable having a
thickness and characteristics higher than 5C-FB, and use a BNC for the connector.

Signal GND

6-7-6. DVI-A, DVI-B (DVI digital Input connector) (DVI-D 24 pin)

This is a single link DVI input connector that is compliant with hot plug detect (HPD). Use a single link cable. Noise may be
generated in the video if you use a dual link cable.
EDID is available even when the projector is switched off.

Pin No. Signal Name Pin No. Signal Name

24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17
16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 1 TMDS Data 2- 13 unused
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 2 TMDS Data 2+ 14 +5V Power
3 TMDS Data 2 Shield 15 Ground
Pin view of female connector
4 Unused 16 Hot Plug Detect*
5 Unused 17 TMDS Data 0-
6 DDC Clock 18 TMDS Data 0+
7 DDC Data 19 TMDS Data 0 Shield
8 Unused 20 unused
9 TMDS Data 1- 21 unused
10 TMDS Data 1+ 22 TMDS Clock Shield
11 TMDS Data 1 Shield 23 TMDS Clock+
12 Unused 24 TMDS Clock-

50
 6. Appendix

6-8. Related products list

Product name Model name

Lens Zoom Lens 1.45 to 1.8:1 L2K-14ZM
Zoom Lens 1.8 to 2.4:1 L2K-18ZM
Zoom Lens 2.2 to 3.0:1 L2K-22ZM
Zoom Lens 3.0 to 4.3:1 L2K-30ZM
Anamorphic lens Anamorphic lens 1.25 AL 1.25
Anamorphic lens manually operated turret Anamorphic turret AS 1.25
Lamp house module (excluding lamp) Lamp house module IS8LH-E
Lamp Lamp IS8LP4-E
Wireless LAN card Wireless LAN Card NWL-100 Series (Note)

(Note) Please contact your dealer/distributor for details on product and model names .

51
 6. Appendix

(MEMO)

52
© NEC Viewtechnology. Ltd. 2006 Printed in Japan
Ver.2 06/06
 NC800C User’s Manual

Printed on recycled paper

7N8P6422
 TROUBLESHOOTING

1. Power supply abnormality

Turn the Main Power ON. (Standby).

No

Is “Standby” displayed at LCD? Refer to Cause (Power supply) and

take adequate measures.
Yes
Yes
Is there any error indication? Refer to the Error Code Table and
take adequate measures.

No
Yes Yes
Is the projector started when the Is there any error indication? Refer to the Error Code
power is turned ON? Table and take adequate
measures.

No
Yes
Is the external control mode set at Turn the power ON from equipment
Enable? in external control mode or disable
the external control mode.
No
Yes
Is it started with a remote control? The PJKEY PWB is faulty or the
connectors are disconnected.
No

The fault is considered to result from the following causes:

• Check POPK#5 of the DIV PWB. (GPSU control wire)
In normal state, the Lo level is maintained with the status change of Standby → Power ON. If this Lo level
is maintained in both modes of Standby and Power ON, this fault may have been caused by POPK con-
nector disconnection.

• Check whether there is a status change of Hi → Lo when POUL#2 of the DIV PWB and CPU PWB makes
a status change of Standby → Power ON. (POWER_BIT)
DIV PWB: No status change / CPU PWB: Status change → DIV PWB is faulty.
DIV PWB: No status change / CPU PWB: No status change → CPU PWB is faulty.

• Connector disconnection between DIV PWB and GPSU

• Fault in DIV PWB / CPU PWB / GPSU

“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”

4-1
 TROUBLESHOOTING

The following causes can be considered:

• 5V (S) is not generated.
Check whether 5V is applied to TP5607 of the DIV PWB.
If no voltage is applied, measure the resistance between TP5607 and chassis to confirm that there is no
short-circuiting.
If TP5607 is not short-circuited, the fault is considered to stay in the standby power supply or be caused by
cable disconnection.

• 5V (S) is generated.
The fault is considered to result from breakage or disconnection of cables between the CPU PWB and the
DIV PWB or among the CPU PWB, the I/O PWB, and the KEY PWB. Otherwise, the CPU PWB, the KEY
PWB, or the LCD is faulty.

TP5607
POCP

“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”

4-2
 TROUBLESHOOTING

2. Picture abnormality

• The input signals shall be applied in the state that the power supply is turned OFF.
• The signal source level shall be identical with the GND level of the projector.
• For reasons of equipment protection, the signal source and the projector shall be connected,
without fail, in the state that the power supply is turned OFF.
• Confirm the quality of cables that are being connected.
HDSDI: 5C-FB or above
DVI-D: Single link 2[m]

Confirm that no lens cover is attached and assume the lamp lighting condition.

Confirm that Picture

Mute and Douser Valid Release Picture Mute and Douser.
are invalid

Invalid

Confirm that the input

signal is applicable to Inapplicable signal Enter the signal input that is applicable to the projector.
the projector

Applicable signal

Confirm that there is Fail Check the Error Code table for application.
no failure

No fail

Select TEST Pattern (Lamp)

and confirm that projection Screen error
involves no noise

OK

Confirm all inputs for Confirm that TI Release is

HDSDI-A, HDSDI-B, NG kept unchanged (Interface, Processor, NG Reinstallation of TI Release
DVI-A, and DVI-B EBIB, Formatter)

OK

• DIV PWB voltage check • DIV PWB voltage error → Replacement

• FPC cable check of GPSU
NG • FPC cable rearrangement
OK • PWB lifting check
(Interface, Processor, EBIB) Replace cables if they are damaged.
• PWB lifting → Insert it again.

OK

Restart the power supply and check Interface or TI Mother PWB is faulty.
the conditions again.
Reconfirm that there are no failures.

“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”

4-3
 TROUBLESHOOTING

Voltage checks for 3.3V / 5V / 12V / 24V in DIV PWB

Voltage checks in the section of TEST Points ? GND as specified below.
TP5610 (around PON11) : 3.40±0.05 [VDC]
TP5609 (around PON11) : 5.10 + 0.1 [VDC]
–0.0 [VDC]
TP5611 (around PON11) : 12.00±0.1 [VDC]

TP5607 TP5609
POCP TP5611 TP5610

POPN TP5601 TP5604 PON11 PON10

“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”

4-4
 TROUBLESHOOTING

3. Lens control is impossible

Lens adjustments impossible

Is it possible to make adjustments of signal changeover, etc., other than the lens items, by means of a remote control?

Yes No

Check the remote control and the remote control cable.

Is it impossible to make all adjustments of Focus, Shift, and Zoom?

Yes No

Is P0DM#3 maintained at the GND level while the lens function is selected?

Yes No

CPU_M PWB error

Is the Zoom function available?

No Yes

Check the lens connector.

MOTOR PWB error

Is a power supply (12V) applied to P0PD#1?

Yes No

Check 12V at the DIV PWB.

MOTOR PWB error

“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”

4-5
 4. Erroe code list
Error No. Contents LCD display Faulty spot Countermeasures to be taken
1 Lamp cover open LAMP COVER OPEN LAMP LAMPCOVER Shut the lamp cover again.
2 Temperature error (Lamp temperature) OVERTEMP.LAMP LampHouse Check temperatures around the projector and the lamp house. Confirm that there is no problem in regard to suction and exhaust air.
3 Fan stop FAN STOP FAN Check fan connections and fan rotation. FAN STOP FAN Check fan connections and fan rotation.
4 Power unit (General-purpose power supply unit) error GPSU Fail GPSU (Power supply for MAIN) Check the GPSU.
5 Lamp failing in lighting Lamp unit Lamp power supply (LPSU) and lamp bulb Check the lamp bulb and the LPSU.
8 Temperature error (Inner temperature of lamp power supply) OVERTEMP.LPSU Lamp power supply (LPSU) Check the ambient temperature around the LPSU and examine whether there is any problem in suction and exhaust air.
10 Source voltage error in TI circuit DLP PGOOD Fail GPSU, DIV PWB, CPU PWB, and each connector Check voltages at TP5610, TP5609, and TP5611.
Check voltages at TP5610, TP5609, and TP5611.
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”

11 Communication error with the TI circuit DLP COMM FAIL Interface PWB, GPSU, DIV PWB, CPU PWB, and each connector Check the condition of Inerface PWB unsertion.
Check the condition of PON8 connector insertion.
12 E2PROM data readout error E2PROM R Fail CPU PWB, DIV PWB, LAMP TIMER PWB, and each connector Check the condition of Lamp House installation. Check the Lamp TIMER PWB.
13 Interlock error Interlock Fail – Check the condition of interlock.
15 E2PROM data write error E2PROM W Fail CPU PWB, DIV PWB, LAMP TIMER PWB, and each connector Check the condition of Lamp House installation. Check the Lamp TIMER PWB.
16 Lamp fan stop FAN STOP LAMP CPU PWB, DIV PWB, Lamp FAN, and each connector Check fan connections and fan rotation.
18 Temperature error (DMD temperature) OVERTEMP.DMD FAN PWB, DMD, and each connector Check the conditions of ambient temperature, supply and exhaust air, connections, and the cooling system. (Heat sink installations)
19 E2PROM data write error E2ROM DATA ERR CPU PWB, DIV PWB, LAMP TIMER PWB, and each connector Check the condition of Lamp House installation. Check the Lamp TIMER PWB.
120 Mismatching between TI and NEC circuits (File system, etc.) DLP Ack Fail Interface PWB, CPU PWB Check the contents of Title List, Macro, PCF, TGA, MCGD, and Screen files.
123 Excess of lamp bulb accumulated time (alarm) Bulb Over Time Lamp bulb Replace the lamp bulb.
125 Lamp power supply error LPSU Fail Lamp power supply (LPSU) Check the LPSU.
130 Communication error with the built-in MMS MMS Comm Fail
131 Fan stop in the built-in MMS MMS Fan Stop MM2000B Refer to the MM2000B Service Manual.
132 Occurrence of an error inside the built-in MMS MMS Fail

TROUBLESHOOTING
160 Power unit (general-purpose power supply unit) fan error Fan Stop GPSU GPSU (Power supply for MAIN) Check the GPSU.
20 TI Engine: System error System Fail TI Enigne
21 TI Engine: Self-diagnostic error Self Test Fail TI Engine
22 TI Engine: CPU (ARM) error ARM Fail TI Engine
23 TI Engine: DSP error DSP Fail TI Engine
24 TI Engine: Interface Board: FPGA error Interface FPGA Fail Interface Board
25 TI Engine: Processor Board: FPGA error Processor FPGA Fail Processor Board
4-6

30 TI Engine: Interface Board: Error IB Diag Not Performed

31 TI Engine: Interface Board: Error IB FPGA Code Invailid
32 TI Engine: Interface Board: Error IB FPGA INITZ Fail
33 TI Engine: Interface Board: Error IB FPGA No-Load Set
34 TI Engine: Interface Board: Error IB FPGA DONE Fail
35 TI Engine: Interface Board: Error IB FPGA Reg R/W Fail
36 TI Engine: Interface Board: Error IB Framestore Test Fail
37 TI Engine: Interface Board: Error IB ANC FIFO Test Fail
38 TI Engine: Interface Board: Error IB RTC Serial # Fail
39 TI Engine: Interface Board: Error IB UART0 Fail Interfce Board Check the board fitting (loose connection) for the TI Engine.
40 TI Engine: Interface Board: Error IB UART1 Fail Check the TI Engine source voltages of 3.3V, 5.0V, and 12V (at the DIV PWB).
41 TI Engine: Interface Board: Error IB IIC Fail
42 TI Engine: Interface Board: Error IB Ethernet Fail
43 TI Engine: Interface Board: Error IB Sync-Serial Fail
44 TI Engine: Interface Board: Error IB Fail System Fail
45 TI Engine: Interface Board: Error IB Formatter Fail
46 TI Engine: Interface Board: Error IB Flash Protect Fail
47 TI Engine: Interface Board: Error IB GPI Macro Fail
48 TI Engine: Interface Board: Error IB A/D Macro Fail
60 TI Engine: Processor Board: Error PB Diag Not Performed
61 TI Engine: Processor Board: Error PB FPGA Code Invalid
62 TI Engine: Processor Board: Error PB FPGA INITZ Fail
63 TI Engine: Processor Board: Error PB McBSP XRDY Fail
64 TI Engine: Processor Board: Error PB FPGA Done Fail
65 TI Engine: Processor Board: Error PB FPGA Reg R/W Fail Processor Board
66 TI Engine: Processor Board: Error PB Serial-ID Chip Fail
67 TI Engine: Processor Board: Error PB CLUT-SRAM Fail
68 TI Engine: Processor Board: Error PB OvFS-SDRAM Fail
69 TI Engine: Processor Board: Error PB Resizer FIR Fail
70 TI Engine: Processor Board: Error PB Resizer FIFO Fail
71 TI Engine: Processor Board: Error PB Other Fail
90 Red Formatter Board: Error FB Red RDRAM Signature Fail Red Formatter Check the board fitting (loose connection) for the TI Engine.
91 Green Formatter Board: Error FB Green RDRAM Signature Fail Green Formatter Check flat cable fitting (loose connection).
92 Blue Formatter Board: Error FB Blue RDRAM Signature Fail Blue Formatter Check the TI Engine source voltages of 3.3V, 5.0V, and 12V (at the PJDIV PWB).
 TROUBLESHOOTING

5. LAMP COVER OPEN

Cover Open

Improved if the cover is shut again? Yes End of repair service

No

Is there any physical damage in the Cover PWB? No Replacement of Cover PWB

Yes

Is the POKX connector disconnected on the No Reinsertion of the connector

Cover PWB and DIV PWB sides?

Yes

Are POKX #1 and #2 short-circuited when

No Replacement of Cover PWB
the Cover PWB switch is pressed?

Yes

Do #1 and #2 maintain continuity on the

Cover PWB and DIV PWB sides of POKX? No Replacement of POKX

Yes

Is it impossible to remove the fault even after

the replacement of DIV PWB? No End of repair service

Yes

Check the connectors between the CPU PWB

and DIV PWBs, and replace the CPU PWB
if there is no problem

“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”

4-7
 TROUBLESHOOTING

6. OVER TEMP LAMP

Over Temp

Adjust air conditioning so that the

Is the ambient temperature 35°C or above? ambient temperature is below 35°C
Yes
or equipment operating temperature
(upper limit).

No

Is there no clogging at the exhaust port? No Remove the clogging obstacle.

Yes

Is there no clogging in the air filter? No Replace the air filter.

Yes

Is ventilation normal when the power is ON? Replace the related fan if there is any
No
error such as fan stop.

Yes

Check connections to locate POXP

Is #7 maintained at the GND level on the disconnection. Also check the thermo-
DVI PWB side of POXP? No
stat (short-circuited at room tempe-
rature).

Yes

Is there still the fault remaining even after the

replacement of the DIV PWB? No End of repair service

Yes

Check connectors of the CPU PWB and those

located in the section between CPU PWB and
DIV PWB. Replace them, as required.

“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”

4-8
 TROUBLESHOOTING

7. FAN STOP

FAN Stop

Are the respective #3 connectors on the DIV PWB Replace the DIV PWB if Connector
and the FAN PWB maintained at the GND level? Yes POCK#3 on the DIV PWB is not
maintained at the GND level.

No

When the FAN connectors #3 on the DIV PWB

Check for connector disconnections.
and the FAN PWB are not maintained at the GND Yes If there is no problem, replace the fan.
level, is 24V applied to #1 for the associated fans?

No

Check connector connections

Is 24V applied to Connector POPN#1 on the between the DIV PWB and the power
No
DIV PWB? supply. Replace the power supply,
as required.

Yes

Check the connectors of the FAN and CPU PWBs

and those located between CPU PWB and DIV PWB.
Replace them, as required

“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”

4-9
 TROUBLESHOOTING

8. GPSU Fail

GPSU Fail

Check Connector POCL#2 on the DIV PWB.

Is the potential at Connector POPK#6 on the
DIV PWB maintained at the GND level?
Yes
If it is at the GND level, replace the DIV PWB.
No If it is not at the GND level, check the POCL
connections and replace the CPU PWB, as
required.

Is the potential at Connector POPK#5 on the No Replace the power supply.

DIV PWB maintained at the GND level?

Yes

Check connections of the AC PWB and the noise

Is the potential at Connector POPK#1 on the No filter (electrode screws loosened) and examine the
DIV PWB maintained at the GND level? AC source voltage (200 -240V).
Replace the power supply if there is no problem.

Yes

Replace the power supply.

“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”

4-10
 TROUBLESHOOTING

9. Lamp unit

Lamp unit

Is a voltage over 100V generated momentarily

(less than one second) between the + and ?
IGN terminals of the igniter after several seconds
No Replace the lamp power supply.
after the set has been powered ON?
Caution: Never touch the +HV terminal because
a voltage of 30kV appears at that time.

Yes

Is the problem solved when the Lamp House

Yes End of repair service
is replaced?

No

Is the problem solved when the igniter is replaced? Yes End of repair service

No

Check the cabling materials that are relating to

the lamp power supply and the igniter.

“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”

4-11
 TROUBLESHOOTING

10. OVERTEMP.LPSU

OVERTEMP.LPSU

Adjust air conditioning so that the

Is the ambient temperature 35°C or above? ambient temperature is below 35°C
Yes
or equipment operating temperature
(upper limit).

No

Is there no clogging at the exhaust port? Yes Remove the clogging obstacle.

No

Is there no clogging in the air filter? Yes Replace the air filter.

No

Is ventilation normal when the power is ON? Replace the related fan if there is any
No
error such as fan stop.

Yes

Replace the lamp power supply.

“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”

4-12
 TROUBLESHOOTING

11. DLP PGOOD Fail

DLP PGOOD Fail

Are there no connector disconnections on the

DIV PWB as specified below? / POPF, POP1, No Reinsert the associated connectors.
POCK

Yes

Is there no Connector POCK disconnection on

No Reinsert the associated connector.
the CPU PWB and no such abnormality?

Yes

Are there no connector disconnections on the

No Reinsert the associated connector.
GPSU and no such abnormalities?

Yes

Is the potential at Connector POCK#10 on the Replace the DIV PWB. If repair cannot
No
DIV PWB maintained at the GND level? still be finished, replace the GPSU.

Yes

Replace the CPU PWB.

“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”

4-13
 TROUBLESHOOTING

12. DLP COMM FAIL

DLP COMM FAIL

Is board fitting sufficient in the TI Chest? No Reinsert the associated connectors.

Yes

Are the following TP voltages normal on the

Adjust the VR of GPSU to secure a
DIV PWB?
No normal value. Replace the GPSU, as
TP5610: Normal value 3.4V±0.05V
required.
TP5609: Normal value 5.15V±0.05V

No

Replacement work shall be done in the order

specified below. / DIV PWB, CPU PWB, GPSU,
Interface Board

“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”

4-14
 TROUBLESHOOTING

13. E2PROM R Fail

E2PROM W Fail
E2ROM DARA ERR

E2PROM R Fail
E2PROM W Fail
E2ROM DATA ERR

Is the Lamp House normally installed? No Reinstall the Lamp House correctly.

Yes

Is Connector POXP normally inserted on Reinsert the associated connectors.

No
the DIV PWB? Replace the DIV PWB, as required.

Yes

Replace the Lamp House.

“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”

4-15
 TROUBLESHOOTING

14. FAN STOP LAMP

FAN STOP LAMP

Are Connectors PO7002 and PO7003 normally

No Reinsert the associated connectors.
inserted on the DIV PWB?

Yes

Confirm the TP5601 voltage on the

Is 24V applied to Connector PO7002#1 on the DIV PWB. If 24V is available, replace
No
DIV PWB? the DIV PWB. If 24V is not available,
replace the GPSU

Yes

Is 3.3V or pulses available at Connector PO7001

No Replace the CPU PWB.
#1 on the DIV PWB?

Yes

Is Connector PO7002#2 kept at 12V or below

No Replace the DIV PWB.
on the DIV PWB?

Yes

Replace the lamp cooling fan.

“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”

4-16
 TROUBLESHOOTING

15. OVERTEMP. DMD

OVERTEMP. DMD

Adjust air conditioning so that the

ambient temperature is below 35°C
Is the ambient temperature 35°C or above? Yes
or equipment operating temperature
(upper limit).

No

Is there clogging at the exhaust port? Yes Remove the clogging obstacle.

No

Is there no clogging in the air filter? No Replace the air filter.

Yes

Replace the related fan if there is

Is ventilation normal when the power is ON? No
any error such as fan stop.

Yes

Replace the thermistor.

“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”

4-17
 TROUBLESHOOTING

16. DLP ACK Fail

DLP ACK Fail

Is board fitting sufficient in the TI Chest? No Reinsert the associated connectors.

Yes

Are the following TP voltages normal on the

djust the VR of GPSU to secure a
DIV PWB?
No normal value. Replace the GPSU,
TP5610: Normal value 3.4V±0.05V
as required.
TP5609: Normal value 5.15V±0.05V

Yes

Replacement work shall be done in the order

specified below. / CPU PWB, Interface PWB

“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”

4-18
 TROUBLESHOOTING

17. Bulb Over Time

Bulb Over Time

Replace the Lamp House.

“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”

4-19
 TROUBLESHOOTING

18. LPSU Fail

LPSU Fail

Replace the Lamp Power Supply.

“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”

4-20
 TROUBLESHOOTING

19. Fan Stop GPSU

Fan Stop GPSU

Replace the GPSU.

“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”

4-21
 TROUBLESHOOTING

20. System Fail/Self Test Fail/ARM Fail/DSP Fail

System Fail
Self Test Fail
ARM Fail
DSP Fail

Is board fitting sufficient in the TI Chest? No Reinsert the associated connectors

Yes

Are the following TP voltages normal on the

Adjust the VR of GPSU to secure a
DIV PWB?
No normal value. Replace the GPSU, as
TP5610: Normal value 3.4V±0.05V
required.
TP5609: Normal value 5.15V±0.05V

Yes

Is the flat cable condition normal between the Try to reinsert the flat cable.
EFIB and the formatter? No Replace it, as required.

Yes

Is there no problem in the setting conditions

No Try to make setting again.
(file selection, etc.)?

Yes

Replacement work shall be done in the order

specified below. / Interface PWB, Processor PWB,
EFIB PWB, Prism ASSY

“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”

4-22
 TROUBLESHOOTING

21. Interface FPGA Fail IB Diag Not Performed IB FPGA Code Invaild IB FPGA INTZ Fail IB FPGA No-Load Set
IB FPGA DONE Fail IB FPGA Reg R/W Fail IB Framestore Test Fail IB ANC FIFO Test Fail IB RTC Serial # Fail
IB UART0 Fail IB UART1 Fail IB IIC Fail IB Ethernet Fail IB Sync-Serial Fail
IB File System Fail IB Formatter Fail IB Flash Protect Fail IB GPI Macro Fail IB A/D Macro Fail

Interface FPGA Fail IB Diag Not Performed IB FPGA Code Invaild IB FPGA INITZ Fail IB FPGA No-Load Set
IB FPGA DONE Fail IB FPGA Reg R/W Fail IB Framestore Test Fail IB ANC FIFO Test Fail IB RTC Serial # Fail
IB UART0 Fail IB UART1 Fail IB IIC Fail IB Ethernet Fail IB Sync-Serial Fail
IB File System Fail IB Formatter Fail IB Flash Protect Fail IB GPI Macro Fail IB A/D Macro Fail

Is board fitting sufficient in the TI Chest? No Reinsert the associated boards.

Yes

Are the following TP voltages normal on the

Adjust the VR of GPSU to secure a
DIV PWB?
No normal value. Replace the GPSU,
TP5610: Normal value 3.4V±0.05V
as required.
TP5609: Normal value 5.15V±0.05V

Yes

Is the flat cable condition normal between the Try to reinsert the flat cable.
EFIB and the formatter? No Replace it, as required.

Yes

Is there no problem in the setting conditions

No Try to make setting again.
(file selection, etc.)?

Yes

Replace the Interface PWB.

“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”

4-23
 TROUBLESHOOTING

22. Processor FPGA Fail PB Diag Not Performed PB FPGA Code Invaild FB FPGA INITZ Fail PB McBSP XRDY Fail
PB FPGA Done Fail PB FPGA Reg R/W Fail PB Serial-ID Chip Fail PB CLUT-SRAM Fail PB OvFs-SDRAM Fail
PB Resizer FIR Fail PB Resizer FIFO Fail PB Other Fail

Processor FPGA Fail PB Diag Not Performed PB FPGA Code Invaild PB FPGA INITZ Fail PB McBSP XRDY Fail
PB FPGA Done Fail PB FPGA Reg R/W Fail PB Serial-ID Chip Fail PB CLUT-SRAM Fail PB OvFS-SDRAM Fail
PB Resizer FIR Fail PB Resizer FIFO Fail PB Other Fail

Is board fitting sufficient in the TI Chest? No Reinsert the associated boards.

Yes

Are the following TP voltages normal on the

Adjust the VR of GPSU to secure a
DIV PWB?
No normal value. Replace the GPSU,
TP5610: Normal value 3.4V±0.05V
as required.
TP5609: Normal value 5.15V±0.05V

Yes

Is the flat cable condition normal between the Try to reinsert the flat cable.
EFIB and the formatter? No Replace it, as required.

Yes

Is there no problem in the setting conditions

No Try to make setting again.
(file selection, etc.)?

Yes

Replace the Processor PWB.

“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”

4-24
 TROUBLESHOOTING

23. FB Red RDRAM Signature Fail FB Green RDRAM Signature Fail FB Blue RDRAM Signature Fail

FB Red RDRAM Signature Fail FB Green RDRAM Signature Fail FB Blue RDRAM Signature Fail

Is board fitting sufficient in the TI Chest? No Reinsert the associated boards.

Yes

Are the following TP voltages normal on the

Adjust the VR of GPSU to secure a
DIV PWB?
No normal value. Replace the GPSU,
TP5610: Normal value 3.4V±0.05V
as required.
TP5609: Normal value 5.15V±0.05V

Yes

Is the flat cable condition normal between the Try to reinsert the flat cable.
EFIB and the formatter? No Replace it, as required.

Yes

Is there no problem in the setting conditions

No Try to make setting again.
(file selection, etc.)?

Yes

Replace the Prism Assy.

“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”

4-25
 SERVICEMAN MODE

Title Setup
Macro Key setup
Title setup is performed so that a title can be assigned to the Macro Keys 1 to 8.
A maximum of eight titles can be registered.
Using the right and left cursor keys, select the Macro Key number for registration and press the ENTER or
Downward Arrow key.

Macro Key
<Macro Key No. 1>
v v

Using the right and left cursor keys, select the title for registration and press the ENTER key.

Macro Key
Macro Key No. 1
Title No. 10
< Title name >

1 Macro Key
• Selection of Title Memory registration
Example of display

Macro Key
Macro Key No. 1
Title No. 100 (*)
< Title name >

First line : Indication of "Macro Key"

Second line : Indication of Macro Key number (Macro Key Nos. 1 ~ 8)
Third line : Indication of Title number (*1) / Indication of current setup
Fourth line : Indication of Title Name registered (*2)
Or indication of Key Registration delete "---" (*3)
(*1) Indication of the title number for the title selected in the fourth line
When "---" is selected, "Title No. "---" is indicated.
(*2) Indication of the registered titles only
(*3) Even when no registration is made for the Macro Key, "---" is indicated.

“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”

5-1
 SERVICEMAN MODE

Configuration
Setup
Dowser Mode
During the period of title changeover, a dowser is used to select a setup function to perform screen mute.
Example of display

Setup
Dowser Mode
(*)
< Disable >

First line : Indication of "Setup"

Second line : Indication of "Dowser Mode"
Third line : Indication of current setup
Fourth line : For Dowser used: "Enable"
For Dowser not used: "Disable"

Ext. MMS Link

Enabled when External MM connection is made:
Proceed to connect again, connection cutoff commands
Used when the linkage with the MM is disconnected or disconnection is required.
Example of display
Setup
Ext. MMS Link
(*)
< Connect >
First line : Indication of "Setup"
Second line : Indication of "Ext. MMS Link"
Third line : Indication of current setup
Fourth line : For "Enable": "Connect"
For "Disable": "Disconnect" (*1)
(*1) Linkage with the External MM is disconnected.
The status of disconnection is maintained until the next connection is made.

Panel Key Lock

Enable/Disable of the main unit control keys is set up.
Example of display

Setup
Panel Lock Key
(*)
< Lock >

First line : Indication of "Setup"

Second line : Indication of "Panel Key Lock"
Third line : Indication of current setup
Fourth line : Panel key disabled: "Lock"
Panel key enabled: "Unlock"
(*) In the lock mode, canceling is possible by pressing the Cancel key for a long time (10 seconds).

“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”

5-2
 SERVICEMAN MODE

GPIO Port
The control mode is selected for the GPIO Port.

Setup
GPIO Port
(*)
< Cinema Only >
First line : Indication of "Setup"
Second line : Indication of "GPIO Port"
Third line : Void
Fourth line : TI GPIO terminal Native operation : "Cinema Only"
Panel key enabled: "Unlock" NEC external control and terminal sharing operation of
the TI GPIO: "System/Cinema"

Factory Default
Projector setup conditions are returned to the status of shipment from the factory.
1 M Key & Title
Macro Key registration and title initialization are carried out.
Macro Key registration and title are restored to the status of shipment from the factory.
Example of display

Factory Default
M Key & Title
(*)
< Execute >
First line : Indication of "Factory Default"
Second line : Indication of "M Key & Title"
Third line : Void
Fourth line : Indication of "Execute"

2 All
The setting conditions are initialized. (Including Macro Key registration and Title)
The status of shipment from the factory is assumed.
However, lamp setting and network setting are not initialized.
Example of display

Factory Default
All

< Execute >

First line : Indication of "Factory Default"

Second line : Indication of "All"
Third line : Void
Fourth line : Indication of "Execute"

“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”

5-3
 SERVICEMAN MODE

Installation
Image Orient
The projection mode is selected for the projector.
LCD display Method of projection Method of installation
Normal–F Normal Front Normal Front projection
Normal–R Normal Rear Normal Rear projection
UpsideDown–F UpsideDown Front UpsideDown reversal Front projection
UpsideDown–R UpsideDown Rear UpsideDown reversal Rear projection

Example of display

Installation
Image Orient
(*)
<UpsideDown -R >
First line : Indication of "Installation"
Second line : Indication of "Image Orient"
Third line : Indication of current setup
Fourth line : Normal Front : “Normal –F”
UpsideDown Rear : “UpsideDown–R” (*1)
Normal Rear : “Normal–R”
UpsideDown Front : “UpsideDown–F” (*1)
(*1) Enabled only for the NC800C

Lens Center
When the ENTER key is pressed in "Execute" mode, the lens mount (lens shift) position is moved to the center
(reference position).
This is valid only in the directions of up, down, right, and left.
Example of display

Installation
Lens Center

< Execute >

First line : Indication of "Installation"
Second line : Indication of "Lens Center"
Third line : Void
Fourth line : Indication of "Execute"

“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”

5-4
 SERVICEMAN MODE

MMS Select
The mode of a multimedia switcher to be connected is selected.
Built-in : Selection of a built-in multimedia switcher of the projector
External : Selection of a multimedia switcher to be connected externally
Not Use : Multimedia switcher not in use

When Built-in and External are selected without making a connection of multimedia switcher, operation will
sometimes become slow because the projector itself tries to search for the multimedia switcher.
When no multimedia switcher is connected, "Not Use" should be selected.

1 Use of externally connected MMS

Example of display

Installation
MMS Select

< External >

2 MMS not in use

Example of display

Installation
MMS Select

< Not Use >

First line : Indication of "Installation"

Second line : Indication of "MMS Select"
Third line : Indication of current setup
Fourth line : Indication of MMS in linkage
(*) The number of MMSs that are available at the same time is only one.

“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”

5-5
 SERVICEMAN MODE

Baudrate
The data transfer rate [bps] of the RS-232C terminal (SYSTEM) is set up.
4,800 / 9,600 / 19,200 / 38,400 [bps]
Example of display

Installation
Baudrate
(*)
< 4800 >
First line : Indication of "Installation"
Second line : Indication of "Baudrate"
Third line : Indication of current setup
Fourth line : Indication of communication speed
4,800 / 9,600 / 19,200 / 38,400

Date / Time
Projector’s Date and Time are set up.
Date
Year, month, day, day of the week
(*1) 05/07/11 (Mon)
Move the ↑ cursor and enter numeral data through the tenkey.

Time
(*1) 16:27:33
Move the ↑ cursor and enter numeral data through the tenkey.

1 Date setup
Example of display

Data/Time
Data

[ 05/07/11 (Mon) ]

First line : Indication of "Date / Time"

Second line : Indication of "Date"
Third line : Void
Fourth line : Indication of date input (*1)

“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”

5-6
 SERVICEMAN MODE

2 Time setup
Example of display

Data/Time
Time

[ 16:27:33 ]
First line : Indication of "Date / Time"
Second line : Indication of "Time"
Third line : Void
Fourth line : Indication of time input (*1)

Bulb Alignment
This function is used to display the Lamp Brightness value read out by the optical sensor.
This value has no correlation to the projector.

This function ensures easy adjustments when the lamp bulb alignment is adjusted.
Example of display

Installation
Bulb Alignment
Peakhold 4095
< Average 2400 >

First line : Indication of "Installation"

Second line : Indication of "Bulb Alignment"
Third line : Indication of "Peakhold" value
Fourth line : Indication of "Average" value

Peak hold : Maximum value read out by the optical sensor is displayed.
(This value is cleared when ENTER is pressed.)
Average : A mean value of the data obtained by the optical sensor is displayed.

Security Key
The USB Key is produced to control the projector control mode. (Serviceman Mode)
When the USB memory of the Security Key is used, it becomes possible to control the projector in serviceman
mode without using any password.

Example of display
Installation
Security key
Service key
< Execute >

First line : Indication of "Installation"

Second line : Indication of "Security key"
Third line : Indication of "Service key" value (Control Mode)
Fourth line : Indication of "Execute" value

“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”

5-7
 SERVICEMAN MODE

Memory
The present status of Lamp and Lens is overwritten in Entries of the selected lamp and lens memories.

1 Lamp
The present status of Lamp output is overwritten in the selected Lamp Memory Entry.
Example of display

Memory
Lamp
(*)
< Memory Name >

First line : Indication of "Memory"

Second line : Indication of "Lamp"
Third line : Indication of current setup
Fourth line : Indication of Memory Name registered

• Popup Menu
Example of display

**Lamp Memory**
Over Write?
< Yes >
****************

First line : Indication of "Lamp Memory"

Second line : Indication of "Over write"
Third line : Indication of "Yes / No"
Fourth line : Popup decoration

2 Lens
The present status of Lens output is overwritten in the selected Lens Memory Entry.
Example of display

Memory
Lamp
(*)
< Memory Name >

• Popup Menu
Example of display

**Lamp Memory**
Over Write?
< Yes >
****************

First line : Indication of "Lens Memory"

Second line : Indication of "Over write"
Third line : Indication of "Yes / No"
Fourth line : Popup decoration

“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”

5-8
 METHOD OF FIRMWARE UPGRADING

Method of Firmware Upgrading

1. Environmental setup (common)

1) Make connections of PC – Projector through LAN cables.
2) Start up the firmware in Lamp Off mode. (Refer to 9-1. Lamp Off Mode.)

2. Error Status check

1) Start up the "DLP Cinema Control Program" from the PC to accomplish login.
(Refer to 9-3. DLP Cinema Control Program.)
2) Select the "Sys-Status" tab to check the status.
Disregard fails in relation to Self-Test because they are deleted as a result of updating.
If any error is discovered, turn off the projector power supply once and confirm that the Interface, Processor,
and EFIB boards, wire connectors, and flexible cables (between EFIB and Formatter) are correctly installed.

Note) If any failure is perceived in relation to Self-Test after the completion of updating, there must be a
certain kind of problem inside.
It is necessary to take adequate countermeasures separately.

“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”

6-1
 METHOD OF FIRMWARE UPGRADING

3. Version check (Interface, Processor, EFIB, Formatter)

1) Start up the "DLP Cinema Firmware Installation Program" from the PC to accomplish login.
(Refer to 9-2. DLP Cinema Firmware Installation Program.)

2) Press Select Release Installation and select "Release *.*.dlpcinema" to make a comparison of the
Release Version between "Current Projector Info" and "Selected Release" and write it in the table (separate
instruction).
If there is any difference between "Current Projector Info" and "Selected Release" Version, update the
discrepancy items in order.

“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”

6-2
 METHOD OF FIRMWARE UPGRADING

4. Update (Interface, Processor)

1) Start up the "DLP Cinema Firmware Installation Program" from the PC to accomplish login.
(Refer to 9-2. DLP Cinema Firmware Installation Program.)
Note) Use the latest released program, without fail.
2) Press Select Release Installation File to select "Release *.*.dlpcinema."

3) Press Special Operations >> .

Select "Auto-Install Cinema Boards Only" (uppermost stage) and press OK .

4) After the completion of data writing, check the version again. (Interface, Processor)

“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”

6-3
 METHOD OF FIRMWARE UPGRADING

5. Formatter Update (Formatter)

1) Start up the "DLP Cinema Control Program" from the PC to accomplish login.
(Refer to 9-3. DLP Cinema Control Program.)

2) Select the "Flash" tab and select the item and the color to be updated in the "Modular Formatter Flash File
Type" column. Press the Select and Install File button.

3) Select the Update File of the selected item.

Selected folder : ¥¥FormatterSubsystem¥ModularFormatter¥DC2K
Complete writing, without fail, after confirming the Popup Message Update item and the selected file.
Boot App : TI_BOOT_V*.**(**).bin
Config Data : TI_CONFIG_DC2K_DDR_V*.*(**).bin
Main App : TI_MAIN_DDP1000_V*.**(***).bin
Sequence Data : TI_SEQ_DC2K_DDP1000_V*.**(**).bin

4) When a message is displayed in regard to the completion of data writing, proceed to the step of updating
for the next item.
Note) Boot App Update
1 "Boot App" should always be updated last.
2 Boot App Update shall always be carried out for each color (Red / Green / Blue), independently
of each other.
Updating is prohibited for three colors at the same time (ALL3).
Files other than the Boot App file are allowed to perform updating for three colors at the same
time (ALL3).

“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”

6-4
 METHOD OF FIRMWARE UPGRADING

6. EFIB Update (EFIB)

1) Start up the "DLP Cinema Control Program" from the PC to accomplish login.
(Refer to 9-3. DLP Cinema Control Program.)

2) Select the "Flash" tab and select the item to be updated in the "EFIB Flash File Type" column.
Press the button.
Select and Install File

3) Select the Update File of the selected item.

Selected folder : ¥¥FormatterSubsystem¥EFIB Binary Files
Complete writing, without fail, after confirming the Popup Message Update item and the selected file.
EFIB Main App : EFIB_Main_V*.*(**).bin
EFIB FPGA-Main : EFIB_FPGAMain_v*.*(**).bin
EFIB Boot App : EFIB_Boot_V*.*(**).bin
EFIB FPGA-Backup : EFIB_FPGABackup_v*.*(**).bin
EFIB Sequence Data : EFIB_DC2K_SEQData_V*.**(**).bin

4) When a message is displayed in regard to the completion of data writing, proceed to the step of updating
for the next item.
Note) "Boot App" should be updated last.
"EFIB Degamma Data" need not be updated.
When "EFIB FPGA-Main" is updated, "EFIB FPGA-Backup" shall be updated, without fail.

“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”

6-5
 METHOD OF FIRMWARE UPGRADING

7. Cinema Block resetting (Interface, Processor, EFIB, Formatter)

1) Start up the "DLP Cinema Control Program" from the PC to accomplish login.
(Refer to 9-3. DLP Cinema Control Program.)
2) Select the "Connection" tab and press the Reset Projector button.

3) Check the version.

4) Select the "Sys-Status" tab and confirm that the status is free from errors and fails.
Note) If any failure is perceived in relation to Self-Test after the completion of updating, there must be a
certain kind of problem inside. It is necessary to take adequate countermeasures separately.

“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”

6-6
 METHOD OF FIRMWARE UPGRADING

8. NC_data_v**&M10I.MCGD data writing (Interface Board)

1) Start up the "DLP Cinema Control Program" from the PC to accomplish login.
(Refer to 9-3. DLP Cinema Control Program.)
2) Select the "Reg/Batch" tab and press the Batch Files >> button.

3) SOURCE / PCF / SCREEN / TGA file writing

Press the Select Batchfile >> button and select the "put_nec_files_NC_r*_fact.txt" file.

Press the RUN button.

* The "put_nec_files_NC_r*_fact.txt" file automatically writes the SOURCE / PCF / SCREEN / TGA files in the
projector.

“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”

6-7
 METHOD OF FIRMWARE UPGRADING

4) SOURCE / PCF / SCREEN / TGA file writing

Press the Select Batchfile >> button and select the "put_MCGD.txt" file.

Press the RUN button.

* The "put_MCGD.txt" file automatically writes the "M10I.MCGD"

file in the projector. After the completion of writing, press the Close button and close the Batchfile Window.

After Firm & Data writing has been finished for all the items, turn OFF the power supply of the projector.

“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”

6-8
 METHOD OF FIRMWARE UPGRADING

9. Common setup
When adjusting the projector, it is necessary, without fail, to insert the specified USB Memory in the USB
terminal of the projector.
9-1. Lamp Off Mode (Remote Controller operation)

1) In the state of standby, keep pressing the CTL + PIXEL keys for ten seconds.

2) Since the information below is displayed in the LCD screen, select [YES] and press the ENTER key.

3) Turn ON the power supply starting with the Remote Controller or the Projector Main Body key.

Note) Lamp Off Mode is canceled when the power supply is turned OFF.
If the power supply is turned ON again in the Lamp Off mode, follow the operational steps of 1 ~ 4.

“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”

6-9
 METHOD OF FIRMWARE UPGRADING

9-2. DLP Cinema Firmware Installation Program

Preliminary arrangements (not required if setup is already finished in the PC)
Make PC network setup to the values specified below.
IP-Address : 192. 168. 010. 17
Gateway : 192. 168. 010. 17
Subnet Mask : 255. 255. 255. 0

1) Start up the "DLP Cinema Firmware Installation Program" from the PC.
Note) Use, without fail, the attached Program for the latest release.

2) Setup of the Projector to be connected

Enter an input of IP Address192.168.10.11.

3) Selection of the Port connection

Select Ethernet Port.

“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”

6-10
 METHOD OF FIRMWARE UPGRADING

4) Connection (Log In)

When the connection (Log In) is successful, Info is displayed in the "Current Projector Info" column.

9-3. DLP Cinema Control Program

Preliminary arrangements (not required if setup is already finished in the PC)
• Make PC network setup to the values specified below.
IP-Address : 192. 168. 010. 17
Gateway : 192. 168. 010. 17
Subnet Mask : 255. 255. 255. 0

1) Start up the "DLP Cinema Control Program" from the PC.

Note) Use, without fail, the attached Program for the latest release.

“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”

6-11
 METHOD OF FIRMWARE UPGRADING

2) Setup of the Projector to be connected

Enter an input of IP Address192.168.10.11.
3) Selection of the Port connection
Select "External Ethernet Port." (When the connection is successful, "Log In" is displayed in "Version Info.")

4) Security setup
Enter the user ID and the password in the Security item and press the Login button.
ID : Service
Password : Heal
Thyself (
: Remaining as a blank)
When Log In is successful, the version information specified below is displayed in "Version Info."

“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”

6-12
 ADJUSTMENTS AND INSPECTIONS ATTRIBUTABLE TO THE REPLECEMENT OF ELECTRICAL AND OPTICAL PARTS

Parts Replacement Work

Replacement of Interface Board Adj. Spec./Test Spec. Replacement of Processor Board Adj. Spec./Test Spec.

Adjust Item Version check for Cinema Software Confirm Cinema Software and refer to Version check for Cinema Software Confirm Cinema Software and refer to
Installation of Cinema Software the Update Flow. Installation of Cinema Software the Update Flow.
Installation of setup Data
Installation of MCGD File

Inspection Signal check Picture quality check Confirm that video pictures can be seen. Picture quality check
Item SDI-A, SDI-B, DVI-A, DVI-B Any input is acceptable.
GPIO Operation check for external control
LAN (TI) terminals
Serial (TI)
Interface Board MSN No. readout Take a memo of numbers on the board.
Digital Certification Digital Cinema Certificate
Refer to Data Acquisition.

Replacement of EFIB Board Adj. Spec./Test Spec. Replacement of Prism Assy Adj. Spec./Test Spec.

Adjust Item Version check for Cinema Software Confirm Cinema Software and refer to Version check for Cinema Software Confirm Cinema Software and refer to
Installation of Cinema Software the Update Flow. Installation of Cinema Software the Update Flow.

Inspection Confirm that video pictures can be seen. Picture quality check Confirm that video pictures can be seen. Picture quality check
Item Any input is acceptable. Any input is acceptable.

“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”

7-1
 ADJUSTMENTS AND INSPECTIONS ATTRIBUTABLE TO THE REPLECEMENT OF ELECTRICAL AND OPTICAL PARTS

Replacement of Flat Cable Adj. Spec./Test Spec. Replacement of CPU Adj. Spec./Test Spec.

Adjust item Version check for Firm&Data

Installation of Firm&Data CPU Board writing

Inspection Confirm that video pictures can be seen. Picture quality check Confirm that video pictures can be seen. Picture quality check
Item Any input is acceptable. Any input is acceptable.
3D check Picture quality check Operation check for each terminal on the Operation check for external control
CPU Board terminals
Serial No. writing Serial No. writing

Digital Certification

Replacement of PJDIV Adj. Spec./Test Spec. Replacement of HUB Adj. Spec./Test Spec.

Adjust Item Adjustment of GPSU output Adjustment of General Power Supply

Unit output (PJDIV Board)
VR8201 Adjustment of optical sensors (PJDIV
Board VR8201)

Inspection Confirm that video pictures can be seen.
Item Any input is acceptable.
Touch panel power supply
Anamorphic turret operation
Picture quality check
Operation check for optional devices
Operation check for optional devices
Provisions shall be enabled to gain
access to the CPU and TI circuit.
The touch panel shall be capable of
operation.
Check operation at the external control
terminal.
4) Ethernet terminal check

“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”

7-2
 ADJUSTMENTS AND INSPECTIONS ATTRIBUTABLE TO THE REPLECEMENT OF ELECTRICAL AND OPTICAL PARTS

Replacement of GPIO Adj. Spec./Test Spec. Replacement of PJKEY Adj. Spec./Test Spec.

Adjust Item

Inspection Operation is secured for the GPIO Operation check for external control Key operation shall be secured.
Item terminals terminal. LED lighting shall be secured. Operation check for external control
LCD operation shall be secured terminals.

Replacement of GPSU (Main PS) Adj. Spec./Test Spec. Replacement of Standby PS Adj. Spec./Test Spec.

Adjust Item Adjustment of GPSU output Adjustment of General Power Supply

Unit output (PJDIV PWB).

Inspection Confirm that video pictures can be seen. Picture quality check Confirm that video pictures can be seen. Picture quality check
Item Any input is acceptable. Any input is acceptable.
Touch panel power supply Operation check for optional devices

“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”

7-3
 ADJUSTMENTS AND INSPECTIONS ATTRIBUTABLE TO THE REPLECEMENT OF ELECTRICAL AND OPTICAL PARTS

Replacement of Lens Mount Adj. Spec./Test Spec.

Adjust item

Inspection Operation check for Lens Shift Limit SW Picture quality check
Item Operation check for Focus Limit SW
Profile and Focus check Operation check for optional devices

“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”

7-4
 ADJUSTMENTS AND INSPECTIONS ATTRIBUTABLE TO THE REPLECEMENT OF ELECTRICAL AND OPTICAL PARTS

Software Check and Update Flow

5-2. Error Status Check

5-3. All Versions Check

Interface and Processor NG NG

Versions

5-4. Interface and Processor

Update

OK

OK

Formatter Version NG NG
NG

5-5. Formatter Update

OK

OK

EFIB Version NG NG

5-6. EFIB Update

OK
OK

5-7. Reset

OK

All Versions Check

“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”

7-5
ADJUSTMENTS AND INSPECTIONS ATTRIBUTABLE TO THE REPLECEMENT OF ELECTRICAL AND OPTICAL PARTS

OK

Error check
(Sys-status)

NG

OK

5-8. NC_data_v** &

M10I.MCGD writing
(Reg/Batch)

OK

Power OFF Power OFF &

Repair

“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”

7-6
 ADJUSTMENTS AND INSPECTIONS ATTRIBUTABLE TO THE REPLECEMENT OF ELECTRICAL AND OPTICAL PARTS

Adjustments at the time of Interface Board replacement

A. Version check (Interface, Processor, EFIB, Formatter) (Version check for Cinema Software)
1) Start up the "DLP Cinema Firmware Installation Program" from the PC to accomplish login.
(Refer to B. DLP Cinema Firmware Installation Program.)

2) Press Select Release Installation and select "Release *.*.dlpcinema" to make a comparison of the Release
Version between "Current Projector Info" and "Selected Release" and write it in the table (separate instruction).
If there is any difference between "Current Projector Info" and "Selected Release" Version, update the
discrepancy items in order.

“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”

7-7
 ADJUSTMENTS AND INSPECTIONS ATTRIBUTABLE TO THE REPLECEMENT OF ELECTRICAL AND OPTICAL PARTS

B. DLP Cinema Firmware Installation Program (Installation of Cinema Software)

Preliminary arrangements (not required if setup is already finished in the PC)
Make PC network setup to the values specified below.
IP-Address : 192. 168. 010. 17
Gateway : 192. 168. 010. 17
Subnet Mask : 255. 255. 255. 0

1) Start up the "DLP Cinema Firmware Installation Program" from the PC.
Note) Use, without fail, the attached Program for the latest release.

2) Setup of the Projector to be connected

Enter an input of IP Address192.168.10.11.

3) Selection of the Port connection

Select Ethernet Port.

4) Connection (Log In)

When the connection (Log In) is successful, Info is displayed in the "Current Projector Info" column.

“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”

7-8
 ADJUSTMENTS AND INSPECTIONS ATTRIBUTABLE TO THE REPLECEMENT OF ELECTRICAL AND OPTICAL PARTS

C. Update (Interface, Processor) (Installation of the setup data)

1) Start up the "DLP Cinema Firmware Installation Program" from the PC to accomplish login.
(Refer to B. DLP Cinema Firmware Installation Program.)
Note) Use the latest released program, without fail.
2) Press Select Release Installation File to select "Release *.*.dlpcinema."

3) Press Special Operations >> .

Select "Auto-Install Cinema Boards Only" (uppermost stage) and press OK .

4) After the completion of data writing, check the version again. (Interface, Processor)

D. NC_data_v**&M10I.MCGD data writing (Interface Board)

(Installation of the MCGD file)
1) Start up the "DLP Cinema Control Program" from the PC to accomplish login.
(Refer to E-8. DLP Cinema Control Program.)

“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”

7-9
 ADJUSTMENTS AND INSPECTIONS ATTRIBUTABLE TO THE REPLECEMENT OF ELECTRICAL AND OPTICAL PARTS

2) Select the "Reg/Batch" tab and press the Batch Files >> button.

3) SOURCE / PCF / SCREEN / TGA file writing

Press the button and select the "put_nec_files_NC_r*_fact.txt" file.
Select Batchfile >>

Press the RUN button.

* The "put_nec_files_NC_r*_fact.txt" file automatically writes the SOURCE / PCF / SCREEN / TGA files in the
projector.

“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”

7-10
 ADJUSTMENTS AND INSPECTIONS ATTRIBUTABLE TO THE REPLECEMENT OF ELECTRICAL AND OPTICAL PARTS

4) SOURCE / PCF / SCREEN / TGA file writing

Press the Select Batchfile >> button and select the "put_MCGD.txt" file.

Press the RUN button.

* The "put_MCGD.txt" file automatically writes the "M10I.MCGD"

file in the projector. After the completion of writing, press the Close button and close the Batchfile Window.
After Firm & Data writing has been finished for all the items, turn OFF the power supply of the projector.

“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”

7-11
 ADJUSTMENTS AND INSPECTIONS ATTRIBUTABLE TO THE REPLECEMENT OF ELECTRICAL AND OPTICAL PARTS

E-8. DLP Cinema Control Program

Preliminary arrangements (not required if setup is already finished in the PC)
• Make PC network setup to the values specified below.
IP-Address : 192. 168. 010. 17
Gateway : 192. 168. 010. 17
Subnet Mask : 255. 255. 255. 0

1) Start up the "DLP Cinema Control Program" from the PC.

Note) Use, without fail, the attached Program for the latest release.

2) Setup of the Projector to be connected

Enter an input of IP Address192.168.10.11.
3) Selection of the Port connection
Select "External Ethernet Port." (When the connection is successful, "Log In" is displayed in "Version Info.")

4) Security setup
Enter the user ID and the password in the Security item and press the Login button.
ID : Service
Password : Heal
Thyself (
: Remaining as a blank)
When Log In is successful, the version information specified below is displayed in "Version Info."

“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”

7-12
 ADJUSTMENTS AND INSPECTIONS ATTRIBUTABLE TO THE REPLECEMENT OF ELECTRICAL AND OPTICAL PARTS

Inspection at the time of Interface Board replacement

A. Picture quality check (Signal check: SDI-A, SDI-B, DVI-A, DVI-B)
1) DVI input terminal check
1 Connect the DVI-A terminal with a digital RGB signal generator through a DVI-D cable.
2 Change over the projector title to Macro Key "3" (DVI-A).
3 Display the Ramp signals to confirm the freedom from gradation skip, coloring, and others.
4 Display SMPTE patterns and others to confirm the freedom from jitter, coloring, etc.
5 Change the connection to the DVI-B input terminal of the projector.
6 Change over the projector title to Macro Key "4" (DVI-B) and make confirmation for Items 3 ~ 4.

2) HD-SDI input terminal check

1 Connect the SDI-A terminal with an SDI signal generator through a BNC cable (5C-FB).
2 Change over the projector title to Macro Key "1" (SDI-A).
3 Display the Ramp signals to confirm the freedom from gradation skip, coloring, and others.
4 Display chart patterns and others to confirm the freedom from jitter, coloring, etc.
5 Change the connection to the SDI-B input terminal of the projector.
6 Change over the projector title to Macro Key "2" (SDI-B) and make confirmation for Items 3 ~ 4.

B. Take a memo of the numbers on the board. (Interface Board MSN No. writing)

“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”

7-13
 ADJUSTMENTS AND INSPECTIONS ATTRIBUTABLE TO THE REPLECEMENT OF ELECTRICAL AND OPTICAL PARTS

C. Acquisition of Digital Cinema Certificate Data (Digital Certification)

Interface Board (Applicable to 7N950921, 7N950851)
1) Connect the projector with the PC through a LAN cable.
2) Make PC network setup to the values specified below.
IP-Address : 192. 168. 010. 17
Gatway : 192. 168. 010. 17
Subnet Mask : 255. 255. 255. 0
3) Start up "ReadCert.exe" from the PC.
Make "System IP Address" and "Cinema IP Address" setup to the values specified below.
System IP Address : 192. 168. 010. 010
Cinema IP Address : 192. 168. 010. 011
Press Execute and get the information.

4) The required data have been acquired when the characters of "Complete!" are displayed at the final line in
the screen.

5) The data file is located in the folder where the "ReadCert.exe" file is present. The file name is stored with the
Serial No. of the projector.
Confirm that the stored file is identical with the Serial No. of the projector.

Caution : If this data file is not available, the projector becomes useless.
Therefore, the acquired data should be sent separately to the NEC-VT Quality Control Group.

“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”

7-14
 ADJUSTMENTS AND INSPECTIONS ATTRIBUTABLE TO THE REPLECEMENT OF ELECTRICAL AND OPTICAL PARTS

Adjustments at the time of Processor Board replacement

A. Version check (Interface, Processor, EFIB, Formatter) (Version check for Cinema Software)
1) Start up the "DLP Cinema Firmware Installation Program" from the PC to accomplish login.
(Refer to B. DLP Cinema Firmware Installation Program.)

2) Press Select Release Installation and select "Release *.*.dlpcinema" to make a comparison of the
Release Version between "Current Projector Info" and "Selected Release" and write it in the table (separate
instruction).
If there is any difference between "Current Projector Info" and "Selected Release" Version, update the
discrepancy items in order.

“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”

7-15
 ADJUSTMENTS AND INSPECTIONS ATTRIBUTABLE TO THE REPLECEMENT OF ELECTRICAL AND OPTICAL PARTS

B. DLP Cinema Firmware Installation Program (Installation of Cinema Software)

Preliminary arrangements (not required if setup is already finished in the PC)
Make PC network setup to the values specified below.
IP-Address : 192. 168. 010. 17
Gateway : 192. 168. 010. 17
Subnet Mask : 255. 255. 255. 0

1) Start up the "DLP Cinema Firmware Installation Program" from the PC.
Note) Use, without fail, the attached Program for the latest release.

2) Setup of the Projector to be connected

Enter an input of IP Address192.168.10.11.

3) Selection of the Port connection

Select Ethernet Port.

4) Connection (Log In)

When the connection (Log In) is successful, Info is displayed in the "Current Projector Info" column.

“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”

7-16
 ADJUSTMENTS AND INSPECTIONS ATTRIBUTABLE TO THE REPLECEMENT OF ELECTRICAL AND OPTICAL PARTS

C. Update (Interface, Processor) (Installation of the setup data)

1) Start up the "DLP Cinema Firmware Installation Program" from the PC to accomplish login.
(Refer to B. DLP Cinema Firmware Installation Program.)
Note) Use the latest released program, without fail.
2) Press Select Release Installation File to select "Release *.*.dlpcinema."

3) Press Special Operations >> .

Select "Auto-Install Cinema Boards Only" (uppermost stage) and press OK .

4) After the completion of data writing, check the version again. (Interface, Processor)

“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”

7-17
 ADJUSTMENTS AND INSPECTIONS ATTRIBUTABLE TO THE REPLECEMENT OF ELECTRICAL AND OPTICAL PARTS

Inspection at the time of Processor Board replacement

A. Picture quality check (Confirmation of picture presentation: No rules in regard to the input signals)
1) DVI input terminal check
1 Connect the DVI-A terminal with a digital RGB signal generator through a DVI-D cable.
2 Change over the projector title to Macro Key "3" (DVI-A).
3 Display the Ramp signals to confirm the freedom from gradation skip, coloring, and others.
4 Display SMPTE patterns and others to confirm the freedom from jitter, coloring, etc.
5 Change the connection to the DVI-B input terminal of the projector.
6 Change over the projector title to Macro Key "4" (DVI-B) and make confirmation for Items 3 ~ 4.

2) HD-SDI input terminal check

1 Connect the SDI-A terminal with an SDI signal generator through a BNC cable (5C-FB).
2 Change over the projector title to Macro Key "1" (SDI-A).
3 Display the Ramp signals to confirm the freedom from gradation skip, coloring, and others.
4 Display chart patterns and others to confirm the freedom from jitter, coloring, etc.
5 Change the connection to the SDI-B input terminal of the projector.
6 Change over the projector title to Macro Key "2" (SDI-B) and make confirmation for Items 3 ~ 4.

“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”

7-18
 ADJUSTMENTS AND INSPECTIONS ATTRIBUTABLE TO THE REPLECEMENT OF ELECTRICAL AND OPTICAL PARTS

Adjustments at the time of EFIB Board replacement

A. Version check (Interface, Processor, EFIB, Formatter) (Version check for Cinema Software)
1) Start up the "DLP Cinema Firmware Installation Program" from the PC to accomplish login.
(Refer to B. DLP Cinema Firmware Installation Program.)

2) Press Select Release Installation and select "Release *.*.dlpcinema" to make a comparison of the Release
Version between "Current Projector Info" and "Selected Release" and write it in the table (separate instruction).
If there is any difference between "Current Projector Info" and "Selected Release" Version, write it in the
table (separate instruction).

“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”

7-19
 ADJUSTMENTS AND INSPECTIONS ATTRIBUTABLE TO THE REPLECEMENT OF ELECTRICAL AND OPTICAL PARTS

B. DLP Cinema Firmware Installation Program (Installation of Cinema Software)

Preliminary arrangements (not required if setup is already finished in the PC)
Make PC network setup to the values specified below.
IP-Address : 192. 168. 010. 17
Gateway : 192. 168. 010. 17
Subnet Mask : 255. 255. 255. 0

1) Start up the "DLP Cinema Firmware Installation Program" from the PC.
Note) Use, without fail, the attached Program for the latest release.

2) Setup of the Projector to be connected

Enter an input of IP Address192.168.10.11.

3) Selection of the Port connection

Select Ethernet Port.

4) Connection (Log In)

When the connection (Log In) is successful, Info is displayed in the "Current Projector Info" column.

“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”

7-20
 ADJUSTMENTS AND INSPECTIONS ATTRIBUTABLE TO THE REPLECEMENT OF ELECTRICAL AND OPTICAL PARTS

C. EFIB Update (EFIB) (Installation of the setup data)

1) Start up the "DLP Cinema Control Program" from the PC to accomplish login.
(Refer to D. DLP Cinema Control Program.)

2) Select the "Flash" tab and select the item to be updated in the "EFIB Flash File Type" column.
Press the Select and Install File button.

3) Select the Update File of the selected item.

Selected folder : ¥¥FormatterSubsystem¥EFIB Binary Files
Complete writing, without fail, after confirming the Popup Message Update item and the selected file.
EFIB Main App : EFIB_Main_V*.*(**).bin
EFIB FPGA-Main : EFIB_FPGAMain_v*.*(**).bin
EFIB Boot App : EFIB_Boot_V*.*(**).bin
EFIB FPGA-Backup : EFIB_FPGABackup_v*.*(**).bin
EFIB Sequence Data : EFIB_DC2K_SEQData_V*.**(**).bin

4) When a message is displayed in regard to the completion of data writing, proceed to the step of updating
for the next item.
Note) "Boot App" should be updated last.
"EFIB Degamma Data" need not be updated.
When "EFIB FPGA-Main" is updated, "EFIB FPGA-Backup" shall be updated, without fail.

D. DLP Cinema Control Program

Preliminary arrangements (not required if setup is already finished in the PC)
• Make PC network setup to the values specified below.
IP-Address : 192. 168. 010. 17
Gateway : 192. 168. 010. 17
Subnet Mask : 255. 255. 255. 0

1) Start up the "DLP Cinema Control Program" from the PC.

Note) Use, without fail, the attached Program for the latest release.

“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”

7-21
 ADJUSTMENTS AND INSPECTIONS ATTRIBUTABLE TO THE REPLECEMENT OF ELECTRICAL AND OPTICAL PARTS

2) Setup of the Projector to be connected

Enter an input of IP Address 192.168.10.11.
3) Selection of the Port connection
Select "External Ethernet Port." (When the connection is successful, "Log In" is displayed in "Version Info.")

4) Security setup
Enter the user ID and the password in the Security item and press the Login button.
ID : Service
P : Heal
Thyself (
: Remaining as a blank)
When Log In is successful, the version information specified below is displayed in "Version Info."

“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”

7-22
 ADJUSTMENTS AND INSPECTIONS ATTRIBUTABLE TO THE REPLECEMENT OF ELECTRICAL AND OPTICAL PARTS

Inspection at the time of EFIB Board replacement

A. Picture quality check (Confirmation of picture presentation: No rules in regard to the input signals)
1) DVI input terminal check
1 Connect the DVI-A terminal with a digital RGB signal generator through a DVI-D cable.
2 Change over the projector title to Macro Key "3" (DVI-A).
3 Display the Ramp signals to confirm the freedom from gradation skip, coloring, and others.
4 Display SMPTE patterns and others to confirm the freedom from jitter, coloring, etc.
5 Change the connection to the DVI-B input terminal of the projector.
6 Change over the projector title to Macro Key "4" (DVI-B) and make confirmation for Items 3 ~ 4.

2) HD-SDI input terminal check

1 Connect the SDI-A terminal with an SDI signal generator through a BNC cable (5C-FB).
2 Change over the projector title to Macro Key "1" (SDI-A).
3 Display the Ramp signals to confirm the freedom from gradation skip, coloring, and others.
4 Display chart patterns and others to confirm the freedom from jitter, coloring, etc.
5 Change the connection to the SDI-B input terminal of the projector.
6 Change over the projector title to Macro Key "2" (SDI-B) and make confirmation for Items 3 ~ 4.

“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”

7-23
 ADJUSTMENTS AND INSPECTIONS ATTRIBUTABLE TO THE REPLECEMENT OF ELECTRICAL AND OPTICAL PARTS

Adjustments at the time of Prism Assy replacement

A. Version check (Interface, Processor, EFIB, Formatter) (Version check for Cinema Software)
1) Start up the "DLP Cinema Firmware Installation Program" from the PC to accomplish login.
(Refer to B. DLP Cinema Firmware Installation Program.)

2) Press Select Release Installation and select "Release *.*.dlpcinema" to make a comparison of the Release
Version between "Current Projector Info" and "Selected Release" and write it in the table (separate instruction).
If there is any difference between "Current Projector Info" and "Selected Release" Version, update the
discrepancy items in order.

“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”

7-24
 ADJUSTMENTS AND INSPECTIONS ATTRIBUTABLE TO THE REPLECEMENT OF ELECTRICAL AND OPTICAL PARTS

B. DLP Cinema Firmware Installation Program

Preliminary arrangements (not required if setup is already finished in the PC)
Make PC network setup to the values specified below.
IP-Address : 192. 168. 010. 17
Gateway : 192. 168. 010. 17
Subnet Mask : 255. 255. 255. 0

1) Start up the "DLP Cinema Firmware Installation Program" from the PC.
Note) Use, without fail, the attached Program for the latest release.

2) Setup of the Projector to be connected

Enter an input of IP Address192.168.10.11.

3) Selection of the Port connection

Select Ethernet Port.

4) Connection (Log In)

When the connection (Log In) is successful, Info is displayed in the "Current Projector Info" column.

“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”

7-25
 ADJUSTMENTS AND INSPECTIONS ATTRIBUTABLE TO THE REPLECEMENT OF ELECTRICAL AND OPTICAL PARTS

C. Formatter Update (Formatter) (Installation of the setup data)

1) Start up the "DLP Cinema Control Program" from the PC to accomplish login.
(Refer to D. DLP Cinema Control Program.)

2) Select the "Flash" tab and select the item and the color to be updated in the "Modular Formatter Flash File
Type" column. Press the Select and Install File button.

3) Select the Update File of the selected item.

Selected folder : ¥¥FormatterSubsystem¥ModularFormatter¥DC2K
Complete writing, without fail, after confirming the Popup Message Update item and the selected file.
Boot App : TI_BOOT_V*.**(**).bin
Config Data : TI_CONFIG_DC2K_DDR_V*.*(**).bin
Main App : TI_MAIN_DDP1000_V*.**(***).bin
Sequence Data : TI_SEQ_DC2K_DDP1000_V*.**(**).bin

4) When a message is displayed in regard to the completion of data writing, proceed to the step of updating
for the next item.
Note) Boot App Update
1 "Boot App" should always be updated last.
2 Boot App Update shall always be carried out for each color (Red / Green / Blue), independently of
each other.
Updating is prohibited for three colors at the same time (ALL3).
Files other than the Boot App file are allowed to perform updating for three colors at the same time
(ALL3).

D. DLP Cinema Control Program

Preliminary arrangements (not required if setup is already finished in the PC)
• Make PC network setup to the values specified below.
IP-Address : 192. 168. 010. 17
Gateway : 192. 168. 010. 17
Subnet Mask : 255. 255. 255. 0

1) Start up the "DLP Cinema Control Program" from the PC.

Note) Use, without fail, the attached Program for the latest release.

“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”

7-26
 ADJUSTMENTS AND INSPECTIONS ATTRIBUTABLE TO THE REPLECEMENT OF ELECTRICAL AND OPTICAL PARTS

2) Setup of the Projector to be connected

Enter an input of IP Address 192.168.10.11.
3) Selection of the Port connection
Select "External Ethernet Port." (When the connection is successful, "Log In" is displayed in "Version Info.")

4) Security setup
Enter the user ID and the password in the Security item and press the Login button.
ID : Service
P : Heal
Thyself (
: Remaining as a blank)
When Log In is successful, the version information specified below is displayed in "Version Info."

“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”

7-27
 ADJUSTMENTS AND INSPECTIONS ATTRIBUTABLE TO THE REPLECEMENT OF ELECTRICAL AND OPTICAL PARTS

Adjustments at the time of Prism Assy replacement (Optical)

A. Shadow adjustments (Adjustment of the Fold Mirror)
If a shadow appears at the time of Prism Assy replacement, it is necessary to adjust the Fold Mirror angle in
the optical Enginie block. Then, adjust the balance between illumination area and display area until vertical
and horizontal symmetry is secured.

1) Display "White" of the TEST pattern.

2) Adjust Focus.
3) Turn the Fold Mirror mounting screws (3 positions) and make adjustments to secure the "all white" screen
without any chipping (shadow) around the projected image periphery.

Fold Mirror enlarged

Projector side
1

Fold Mirror mounting screws

Image Area Illumination Area Chipping around the image periphery (Shadow)

A B

Shadow adjustment OK Shadow adjustment NG

4) If the direction of the shadow is in "A," turn the Fold Mirror mounting screw "3" for adjustments. If it is in "B,"
turn the Fold Mirror mounting screws "1" and "2" for adjustments.
Note: When you are confused, firstly make adjustments so that a shadow can be produced in the
upper left section (vertical side) of the screen. Since then, continue adjustments until this
shadow almost disappears.
5) After the completion of adjustments, apply a looseness inhibiting adhesive agent to the Fold Mirror mounting
screws (3 positions) to fix them.

“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”

7-28
 ADJUSTMENTS AND INSPECTIONS ATTRIBUTABLE TO THE REPLECEMENT OF ELECTRICAL AND OPTICAL PARTS

Inspection at the time of Prism Assy replacement

A. Picture quality check for 1) or 2) (Confirmation of picture presentation: No rules in regard to the input
signals)
1) DVI input terminal check
1 Connect the DVI-A terminal with a digital RGB signal generator through a DVI-D cable.
2 Change over the projector title to Macro Key "3" (DVI-A).
3 Display the Ramp signals to confirm the freedom from gradation skip, coloring, and others.
4 Display SMPTE patterns and others to confirm the freedom from jitter, coloring, etc.
5 Change the connection to the DVI-B input terminal of the projector.
6 Change over the projector title to Macro Key "4" (DVI-B) and make confirmation for Items 3 ~ 4.

2) HD-SDI input terminal check

1 Connect the SDI-A terminal with an SDI signal generator through a BNC cable (5C-FB).
2 Change over the projector title to Macro Key "1" (SDI-A).
3 Display the Ramp signals to confirm the freedom from gradation skip, coloring, and others.
4 Display chart patterns and others to confirm the freedom from jitter, coloring, etc.
5 Change the connection to the SDI-B input terminal of the projector.
6 Change over the projector title to Macro Key "2" (SDI-B) and make confirmation for Items 3 ~ 4.

“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”

7-29
 ADJUSTMENTS AND INSPECTIONS ATTRIBUTABLE TO THE REPLECEMENT OF ELECTRICAL AND OPTICAL PARTS

Adjustments at the time of Flat Cable replacement

A. No adjustments are needed for replacement.

“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”

7-30
 ADJUSTMENTS AND INSPECTIONS ATTRIBUTABLE TO THE REPLECEMENT OF ELECTRICAL AND OPTICAL PARTS

Inspection at the time of Flat Cable replacement

A. Picture quality check 1 (Confirmation of picture presentation: No rules in regard to the input signals)
Picture quality check 2 (3D check: 24P SF 2 systems of 1080)
1) DVI input terminal check
1 Connect the DVI-A terminal with a digital RGB signal generator through a DVI-D cable.
2 Change over the projector title to Macro Key "3" (DVI-A).
3 Display the Ramp signals to confirm the freedom from gradation skip, coloring, and others.
4 Display SMPTE patterns and others to confirm the freedom from jitter, coloring, etc.
5 Change the connection to the DVI-B input terminal of the projector.
6 Change over the projector title to Macro Key "4" (DVI-B) and make confirmation for Items 3 ~ 4.

2) HD-SDI input terminal check

1 Connect the SDI-A terminal with an SDI signal generator through a BNC cable (5C-FB).
2 Change over the projector title to Macro Key "1" (SDI-A).
3 Display the Ramp signals to confirm the freedom from gradation skip, coloring, and others.
4 Display chart patterns and others to confirm the freedom from jitter, coloring, etc.
5 Change the connection to the SDI-B input terminal of the projector.
6 Change over the projector title to Macro Key "2" (SDI-B) and make confirmation for Items 3 ~ 4.

“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”

7-31
 ADJUSTMENTS AND INSPECTIONS ATTRIBUTABLE TO THE REPLECEMENT OF ELECTRICAL AND OPTICAL PARTS

Adjustments at the time of CPU replacement

A. CPU Board Firm / Data Writing
A-1. Arrangements
Copy the Firmware and Data files in the Compact Flash memory in the procedures specified below.
1) Copy the Firmware (is25firm_v1xx.bin) file in the "_pjfirm!" folder of the Compact Flash memory.
2) Copy the Data (is25v1xx_factry.bin) file in the "_pjdat!" folder of the Compact Flash memory.
Root
_pjfirm!
is25firm_v1xx.bin
_pjdat!
is25v1xx_factry.bin

3) Insert the Compact Flash memory in the PCCARD slot.

A-2. Data writing

A-2-1. Firm (Projector "MENU CTL" key operation)

1 Pressing the CANCEL key, turn ON the Power SW.

2 When the Status LED is turned green, press the CANCEL key.

3 Press the UP key.

1 2 3

POWER SW
+ CANCEL UP
CANCEL

LCD display
Firm writing End of Firm writing
+---------------------------+ +---------------------------+
Firmware Update Firmware Update
* Completed
+---------------------------+ +---------------------------+

4 Turn OFF the Power SW.

Note) Failure in writing: Power LED keeps blinking in red. ⇒ Retry writing.

“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”

7-32
 ADJUSTMENTS AND INSPECTIONS ATTRIBUTABLE TO THE REPLECEMENT OF ELECTRICAL AND OPTICAL PARTS

A-2-2. Data (Projector "MENU CTL" key operation)

1 Pressing the CANCEL key, turn ON the Power SW.

2 When the Status LED is turned green, press the CANCEL key.

3 Press the MENU key.

1 2 3

POWER SW
+ CANCEL MENU
CANCEL

LCD display

Data writing End of Data writing

+---------------------------+ +---------------------------+
Data Update Data Update
* Completed
+---------------------------+ +---------------------------+

4 Turn OFF the Power SW and remove the Compact Flash memory.
Note) Failure in writing: Power LED keeps blinking in red. ⇒ Retry writing.
After the completion of Firm and Data writing, make the Projector assume the "Standby" condition.
According to "Information → Version" of the LED menu, check the version for the three items specified below.
BIOS / Firmware / Data
Note) In the case of “E2PROM R Fail” → Follow the working steps of Item 3-2-3.
Stop working when no error is seen.

“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”

7-33
 ADJUSTMENTS AND INSPECTIONS ATTRIBUTABLE TO THE REPLECEMENT OF ELECTRICAL AND OPTICAL PARTS

Inspection at the time of CPU replacement

A. Picture quality check for 1) or 2) (Confirmation of picture presentation: No rules in regard to the input
signals)
1) DVI input terminal check
1 Connect the DVI-A terminal with a digital RGB signal generator through a DVI-D cable.
2 Change over the projector title to Macro Key "3" (DVI-A).
3 Display the Ramp signals to confirm the freedom from gradation skip, coloring, and others.
4 Display SMPTE patterns and others to confirm the freedom from jitter, coloring, etc.
5 Change the connection to the DVI-B input terminal of the projector.
6 Change over the projector title to Macro Key "4" (DVI-B) and make confirmation for Items 3 ~ 4.

2) HD-SDI input terminal check

1 Connect the SDI-A terminal with an SDI signal generator through a BNC cable (5C-FB).
2 Change over the projector title to Macro Key "1" (SDI-A).
3 Display the Ramp signals to confirm the freedom from gradation skip, coloring, and others.
4 Display chart patterns and others to confirm the freedom from jitter, coloring, etc.
5 Change the connection to the SDI-B input terminal of the projector.
6 Change over the projector title to Macro Key "2" (SDI-B) and make confirmation for Items 3 ~ 4.

“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”

7-34
 ADJUSTMENTS AND INSPECTIONS ATTRIBUTABLE TO THE REPLECEMENT OF ELECTRICAL AND OPTICAL PARTS

Adjustments at the time of PJDIV Board replacement

A. Adjustment of General Power Supply Unit output (PJDIV Board) (Adjustment of GPSU output)
The shapes of output connectors of the General Power Supply Unit (GPSU) are identical with each other. To
avoid wrong connections, follow the following steps, without fail:
1) Between the Mother PWB and the DIV PWB, pull out the PON11 & PON10 wire connectors and the POPF
wire connector on the DIV PWB side.
2) Standby 5VDC check (POCP Pin1)
Connect the Digital Multi meter to the section of TP5607 (around POCP) – TP5604 (GND) in the DIV PWB.
Turn on the Power SW (from standby state) and check the source voltage.
TP5607 : 5±0.25VDC
3) Start the Projector in the Lamp OFF mode.
4) Confirmation of voltages 3.3V / 5V / 12V/24V
Check the following voltages of TEST Point – GND:
TP5610 (around PON11) : 3.40 ± 0.05 [VDC]
TP5609 (around PON11) : 5.10 + 0.1 [VDC]
– 0.0 [VDC]
TP5611 (around PON11) : 12.00 ± 0.1 [VDC]
TP5601 (around POPN) : 24.00 ± 0.1 [VDC]
After checking the voltage, turn off the projector power supply and install the PON11 & PON10 wire connectors
and the POPF wire connector again, which have been pulled out before work.
Note) Record the measured values (voltages) at TP5601, TP5607, TP5609, TP5610, and TP5611.
When voltages seem to deviate from the standard, adjust the main power supply (separately).

(See the following.)

“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”

7-35
 ADJUSTMENTS AND INSPECTIONS ATTRIBUTABLE TO THE REPLECEMENT OF ELECTRICAL AND OPTICAL PARTS

B. Photo-sensor adjustments (On the PJDIV PWB: VR5701)

Note) Use the projector at AC200V 50Hz, without fail.
1) Display “Black” of the test pattern.
2) Adjust the lamp output to maximum (100%) position.
Note) In order to stabilize the lamp output, continue lamp lighting for more than 5 minutes at 100%
lamp output.
3) Connect the Digital Multi meter to the section of TP5604 (GND) – TP5705 (ADC input) in the DIV PWB.
4) Turn VR5701 and adjust voltage of the Digital Multi meter to 1.5 ±01.V DC.

5) Confirm that voltage of the Digital Multi meter is changed synchronized with variation in the lamp output
when the lamp output [%] is changed (Up and Down).
6) Set the lamp output at 60%.

“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”

7-36
 ADJUSTMENTS AND INSPECTIONS ATTRIBUTABLE TO THE REPLECEMENT OF ELECTRICAL AND OPTICAL PARTS

Inspection at the time of PJDIV replacement

A. Picture quality check for 1) or 2) (Confirmation of picture presentation: No rules in regard to the input
signals)
1) DVI input terminal check
1 Connect the DVI-A terminal with a digital RGB signal generator through a DVI-D cable.
2 Change over the projector title to Macro Key "3" (DVI-A).
3 Display the Ramp signals to confirm the freedom from gradation skip, coloring, and others.
4 Display SMPTE patterns and others to confirm the freedom from jitter, coloring, etc.
5 Change the connection to the DVI-B input terminal of the projector.
6 Change over the projector title to Macro Key "4" (DVI-B) and make confirmation for Items 3 ~ 4.

2) HD-SDI input terminal check

1 Connect the SDI-A terminal with an SDI signal generator through a BNC cable (5C-FB).
2 Change over the projector title to Macro Key "1" (SDI-A).
3 Display the Ramp signals to confirm the freedom from gradation skip, coloring, and others.
4 Display chart patterns and others to confirm the freedom from jitter, coloring, etc.
5 Change the connection to the SDI-B input terminal of the projector.
6 Change over the projector title to Macro Key "2" (SDI-B) and make confirmation for Items 3 ~ 4.

“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”

7-37
 ADJUSTMENTS AND INSPECTIONS ATTRIBUTABLE TO THE REPLECEMENT OF ELECTRICAL AND OPTICAL PARTS

B. Operation check for optional devices (checked when optional devices are installed)
1) This check is needed when a Touch Panel (optional) is installed.
Connect the Touch Panel and confirm that the Projector can be controlled from the Touch Panel.
1 Connect the Touch Panel with NC800C in the state of Power OFF.

NC800C(Top View)

Front
PJDIV Board POPSS2

CPU Board

M8501
or
M8502
DVI Board

Ether Board

LAN
Touch Panel
POWER

NC800C – Touch Panel Connection Diagram

2 Assume the Standby status for the Projector.

Turn ON the Touch Panel power supply and confirm that there is no error.

2) This check is needed when the Multimedia MM2000 (optional) is installed.

1 Connect the NC800C with MM2000 in the state of Power OFF.
2 Use the Digital Cinema Communicator and make setting to assume the MM-interactive mode.
a) Select "SETUP."
b) Select "MMS Setting."
c) Select "Build in" of MMS Select.
d) Press "Apply."

5 c

3 Confirm that the “MMS STATUS” LED blinks in red at the key panel of the projector main unit.

“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”

7-38
 ADJUSTMENTS AND INSPECTIONS ATTRIBUTABLE TO THE REPLECEMENT OF ELECTRICAL AND OPTICAL PARTS

Adjustments at the time of HUB replacement

A. No adjustments are needed for replacement.

“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”

7-39
 ADJUSTMENTS AND INSPECTIONS ATTRIBUTABLE TO THE REPLECEMENT OF ELECTRICAL AND OPTICAL PARTS

Inspection at the time of HUB replacement

A. Check operation at the external control terminal. (Enabled to gain access to the CPU and TI circuit.)

1) Ethernet terminal check

Using the Dos Prompt, check connections by performing pinging to each IP address.

Terminal IP Address
System (NEC) LAN-1 or LAN-2 192. 168. 10. 10
Cinema (TI) LAN-1 or LAN-2 192. 168. 10. 11

“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”

7-40
 ADJUSTMENTS AND INSPECTIONS ATTRIBUTABLE TO THE REPLECEMENT OF ELECTRICAL AND OPTICAL PARTS

Adjustments at the time of PJKEY replacement

A. No adjustments are needed for replacement.

“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”

7-41
 ADJUSTMENTS AND INSPECTIONS ATTRIBUTABLE TO THE REPLECEMENT OF ELECTRICAL AND OPTICAL PARTS

Inspection at the time of PJKEY replacement

A. Operation check for control keys and LEDs
(Capable of key operation / LDE lighting / LCD operation)
1) "Power" key (not required when finished already)
2) "LENS CTL" key
Check key operation in the LENS CTL area.
The characters shall be lit up in the LENS CTL area when "CTL (LENS)" is pressed.
"UP", "DOWN", "LEFT", "RIGHT", "FOCUS+", "FOCUS–",
"ZOOM+", "ZOOM–", "DOUSER"

3) "MENU CTL" key

Check key operation in the MENU CTL area.
"MENU" : Moving from Home screen to Menu Select screen
"ENTER" : Deciding selection
"CANCEL" : Canceling the selection or returning forwards by one
"UP" : Going upwards in the menu
"DOWN" : Going downwards in the menu
"LEFT" : Going leftwards in the menu
"RIGHT" : Going rightwards in the menu

4) "LAMP CTL" key

CTL
(LAMP) : When this key is pressed, the characters shall be lit up in the LAMP CTL area. ("ZOOM+",
"ZOOM –")
CTL
+ LAMP– : The lamp output shall be lowered (Down).
(LAMP)

CTL
+ LAMP+ : The lamp output shall be raised (Up).
(LAMP)

5) "MACRO SELECT" key

Apply signals to the SDI A, SDI B, DVI A, and DVI B terminals. (OK with any images)
CTL
(MACRO) : When this key is pressed, the characters shall be lit up in the MACRO SELECT area.
("1", "2", "3", "4", "5", "6", "7", "8")
CTL
(MACRO)
+ 1-8 : When these keys are pressed, a changeover is made to the registered title.

“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”

7-42
 ADJUSTMENTS AND INSPECTIONS ATTRIBUTABLE TO THE REPLECEMENT OF ELECTRICAL AND OPTICAL PARTS

LCD display : The switched title display shall be obtained.

Images : The switched images shall be free from turbulence.
The MACRO SELECT LED shall be lit up.
Selected Not selected Title not registered
MACRO SELECT LED Lit in orange Lit in green Unlit

List of Macro Keys Registered

At the time of shipment At the time of shipment
Key No.
Title name Terminal Title name Terminal
1 SDI A SDI-A DCDM XYZ 239 SDI-A, B DUAL
2 SDI B SDI-B DCDM XYZ 185 SDI-A, B DUAL
3 DVI A DVI-A DCDM XYZ 239 SDI-A, B DUAL
4 DVI B DVI-B DCDM XYZ 185 SDI-A, B DUAL
5 Cross Hatch TEST Pattern MXFI 239 SDI-A
6 Alignment TEST Pattern MXFI 185 SDI-B
7 White100 TEST Pattern DVI A DVI-A
8 Black TEST Pattern DVI B DVI-B

6) "BACKLIGHT" Switch
Confirm that the following operation is secured:
BACKLIGHT" Switch Status
ON LC Backlight lit in green
OFF LC Backlight unlit

7) "POWER" LED
Confirm that the following operation is secured:
LED Mode Status Processing
POWER Standby Normal Lit in orange
Error Lit in red
Running Normal Lit in green
Error Lit in red
Cooling Normal Blink in orange
DOUSER Close Blink in green

8) "STATUS" LED (not required when finished already)

Confirm that the following operation is secured:
LED Mode Status Processing
STATUS Standby Normal Lit in green
Lit in Lamp Retry Blink in green
Running Normal Unlit
Cooling Normal Unlit
ERROR Error 3 Blinking in red 3 times (0.5 sec.) @ 5-second intervals
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
7-43
 ADJUSTMENTS AND INSPECTIONS ATTRIBUTABLE TO THE REPLECEMENT OF ELECTRICAL AND OPTICAL PARTS

9) "MMS STATUS" LED (executed for 7-16. Operation check for optional devices)
Confirm that the following operation is secured:
LED Mode Status Processing
MMS Not Use Unlit
STATUS Built-in Connections being processed Blinking in green
Being connected Lit in green
Connection error Blinking in red
External Connections being processed Blinking in orange
Being connected Lit in orange
Connection error Blinking in red

“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”

7-44
 ADJUSTMENTS AND INSPECTIONS ATTRIBUTABLE TO THE REPLECEMENT OF ELECTRICAL AND OPTICAL PARTS

Adjustments at the time of GPSU replacement (Main PS)

A. Adjustment of General Power Supply Unit output (PJDIV Board) (Adjustment of GPSU output)
The shapes of output connectors of the General Power Supply Unit (GPSU) are identical with each other. To
avoid wrong connections, follow the following steps, without fail:
1) Between the Mother PWB and the DIV PWB, pull out the PON11 & PON10 wire connectors and the POPF
wire connector on the DIV PWB side.
2) Standby 5VDC check (POCP Pin1)
Connect the Digital Multi meter to the section of TP5607 (around POCP)–TP5604 (GND) in the DIV PWB.
Turn on the Power SW (from standby state) and check the source voltage.
3) Start the Projector in the Lamp OFF mode.
4) Confirmation of voltages 3.3V / 5V / 12V/24V
Check the following voltages of TEST Point – GND:
TP5610 (around PON11) : 3.40 ± 0.05 [VDC]
TP5609 (around PON11) : 5.10 + 0.1 [VDC]
– 0.0 [VDC]
TP5611 (around PON11) : 12.00 ± 0.1 [VDC]
TP5601 (around POPN) : 24.00 ± 0.1 [VDC]
After checking the voltage, turn off the projector power supply and install the PON11 & PON10 wire connectors
and the POPF wire connector again, which have been pulled out before work.
Note) Record the measured values (voltages) at TP5601, TP5607, TP5609, TP5610, and TP5611.
When voltages seem to deviate from the standard, adjust the main power supply (separately).
(See the photo below.)

“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”

7-45
 ADJUSTMENTS AND INSPECTIONS ATTRIBUTABLE TO THE REPLECEMENT OF ELECTRICAL AND OPTICAL PARTS

Inspection at the time of GPSU (Main PS) replacement

A. Picture quality check (Confirmation of picture presentation: No rules in regard to the input signals)
1) DVI input terminal check
1 Connect the DVI-A terminal with a digital RGB signal generator through a DVI-D cable.
2 Change over the projector title to Macro Key "3" (DVI-A).
3 Display the Ramp signals to confirm the freedom from gradation skip, coloring, and others.
4 Display SMPTE patterns and others to confirm the freedom from jitter, coloring, etc.
5 Change the connection to the DVI-B input terminal of the projector.
6 Change over the projector title to Macro Key "4" (DVI-B) and make confirmation for Items 3 ~ 4.

2) HD-SDI input terminal check

1 Connect the SDI-A terminal with an SDI signal generator through a BNC cable (5C-FB).
2 Change over the projector title to Macro Key "1" (SDI-A).
3 Display the Ramp signals to confirm the freedom from gradation skip, coloring, and others.
4 Display chart patterns and others to confirm the freedom from jitter, coloring, etc.
5 Change the connection to the SDI-B input terminal of the projector.
6 Change over the projector title to Macro Key "2" (SDI-B) and make confirmation for Items 3 ~ 4.

“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”

7-46
 ADJUSTMENTS AND INSPECTIONS ATTRIBUTABLE TO THE REPLECEMENT OF ELECTRICAL AND OPTICAL PARTS

Adjustments at the time of Standby PS replacement

A. No adjustments are needed for replacement.

“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”

7-47
 ADJUSTMENTS AND INSPECTIONS ATTRIBUTABLE TO THE REPLECEMENT OF ELECTRICAL AND OPTICAL PARTS

Inspection at the time of Stand by PS replacement

A. Picture quality check (Confirmation of picture presentation: No rules in regard to the input signals)
1) DVI input terminal check
1 Connect the DVI-A terminal with a digital RGB signal generator through a DVI-D cable.
2 Change over the projector title to Macro Key "3" (DVI-A).
3 Display the Ramp signals to confirm the freedom from gradation skip, coloring, and others.
4 Display SMPTE patterns and others to confirm the freedom from jitter, coloring, etc.
5 Change the connection to the DVI-B input terminal of the projector.
6 Change over the projector title to Macro Key "4" (DVI-B) and make confirmation for Items 3 ~ 4.

2) HD-SDI input terminal check

1 Connect the SDI-A terminal with an SDI signal generator through a BNC cable (5C-FB).
2 Change over the projector title to Macro Key "1" (SDI-A).
3 Display the Ramp signals to confirm the freedom from gradation skip, coloring, and others.
4 Display chart patterns and others to confirm the freedom from jitter, coloring, etc.
5 Change the connection to the SDI-B input terminal of the projector.
6 Change over the projector title to Macro Key "2" (SDI-B) and make confirmation for Items 3 ~ 4.

“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”

7-48
 ADJUSTMENTS AND INSPECTIONS ATTRIBUTABLE TO THE REPLECEMENT OF ELECTRICAL AND OPTICAL PARTS

B. Operation check for optional devices (checked when optional devices are installed)
1) This check is needed when a Touch Panel (optional) is installed.
Connect the Touch Panel and confirm that the Projector can be controlled from the Touch Panel.
1 Connect the Touch Panel with NC800C in the state of Power OFF.

NC800C(Top View)

Front
PJDIV Board POPSS2

CPU Board

M8501
or
M8502
DVI Board

Ether Board

LAN
Touch Panel
POWER

NC800C – Touch Panel Connection Diagram

2 Assume the Standby status for the Projector.

Turn ON the Touch Panel power supply and confirm that there is no error.

2) This check is needed when the Multimedia MM2000 (optional) is installed.

1 Connect the NC800C with MM2000 in the state of Power OFF.
2 Use the Digital Cinema Communicator and make setting to assume the MM-interactive mode.
a) Select "SETUP."
b) Select "MMS Setting."
c) Select "Build in" of MMS Select.
d) Press "Apply."

5 c

3 Confirm that the “MMS STATUS” LED blinks in red at the key panel of the projector main unit.

“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”

7-49
 ADJUSTMENTS AND INSPECTIONS ATTRIBUTABLE TO THE REPLECEMENT OF ELECTRICAL AND OPTICAL PARTS

Adjustments at the time of Lens Mount replacement

A. Adjustment of Lens Mount Limits
A-1. Adjustment of Lens Shift Limits
Check the range of movements by Lens Shift operation. (Refer to B5-6. Lens Shift Operation.)

0.265V
(614[mm])

Projected image
1V = Image height

0.20V
(464[mm])
1) Adjustment of upper Lens Mount movements
Move the projected image to the upper side by Lens Shift operation and confirm that a movement of 0.265V
(614[mm] for 4.4[m] of projected image width) is possible. (There shall be no chipping (shadow) around the
projected image periphery.)
If the amount of movement seems to be insufficient, the above-mentioned 0.265V shall be secured by moving
the upper and lower limit switches upwards and downwards.

2) Adjustment of lower Lens Mount movements

Move the projected image to the lower side by Lens Shift operation and confirm that a movement of 0.20V
(464[mm] for 4.4[m] of projected image width) is possible. (There shall be no chipping (shadow) around the
projected image periphery.)
If the amount of movement seems to be insufficient, the above-mentioned 0.20V shall be secured by moving
the upper and lower limit switches upwards and downwards.
If adjustments are carried out, recheck Item 1), without fail.

Loosen the upper and lower Limit Switch screws

and move the plate up and down for adjustments.

The ranges of upper and lower movements are

adjusted at the same time.

B. Lens Shift operation (Remote Controller operation)

1) When the following key operation is performed, the Lens Shift mode is assumed.

: Screen is moved to the right.

▲

CTL +

+
▲

CTL : Screen is moved to the left.

CTL + ▲ : Screen is moved to the top.

CTL + ▼ : Screen is moved to the bottom.

“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
7-50
 ADJUSTMENTS AND INSPECTIONS ATTRIBUTABLE TO THE REPLECEMENT OF ELECTRICAL AND OPTICAL PARTS

CTL + ▲

Image

▼
▼
CTL + CTL +

CTL + ▼

C. Adjustment of Focus Limits

1) Adjustment of the projector screen
Set the width of the projector screen at 4.4[m] and adjust the focus in the center of the screen.

2) Loosen the Focus Limit Switch setscrews (2 positions) in order to let the Limit Switch A contact with the guide
pin (in the state that the section in orange color is pushed in).
Move the Limit Switch A by 2.5[mm] from the guide pin and tighten the Focus Limit Switch setscrews (2
positions). (A clearance of 2.5[mm] toward the case end plane can be secured for the guide pin and the Limit
Switch A.)
2.5[mm]

Guide

Limit Switch B

Limit Switch A Focus Limit Switch

setscrews (2 pcs.)

3) Operation check CTL

In the Lens 0° position, keep pressing the + Focus - buttons to move the lens mount to prism
(LENS)
side (inner side of the projector) and confirm the following items:
• Limit Switch A works and movement of the lens mount stops.
• The primary lens and the lens mount do not touch other parts.

D. Adjustment of the lens mount installation position

1) Project a crosshatch screen of the test pattern at the screen and adjust the focus in the center of the screen.
2) Project a raster 100% all-white screen of the test pattern. If the amount of movement seems to be insufficient
for a rectangle (left side/right side length and top side/bottom side length) in the screen, move the vertical
Limit SW to secure 0.265V for adjustments by moving the main body in horizontal and vertical directions.
(See Caution Note.)
3) Temporarily fasten the lens mount setscrews "A" (in 4 positions). Move the Limit SW forward and backward
for fixing.
4) Loosen the hexagon head setscrews "B" and "C" (6 positions: 2 pcs. in front and rear + 4 pcs. on top) for lens
mount adjustments.
5) In the first place, turn the lens mount to adjust the focus in horizontal and vertical directions.
(The projector screen shall have a raster 100% all-white screen of the test pattern.)
1 Check the focus position (whether it stays in front or in inner part) in the right center and the left center of
the projector screen.

“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”

7-51
 ADJUSTMENTS AND INSPECTIONS ATTRIBUTABLE TO THE REPLECEMENT OF ELECTRICAL AND OPTICAL PARTS

2 Turn one each of the hexagon head setscrews "B" provided in forward and backward directions so that
the focus position comes to the front. Turn the lens mount to move the projector screen so that the focus
is adjusted in the center of the screen.
Caution: Confirm that the all-white screen appears always in the shape of a rectangle when the lens
mount is rotated.
If the screen comes in a trapezoidal shape, proceed to Process (2) for further adjustments.

right and left directions

3 Recheck the focus position in the right and left centers. Proceed to the next step if no problem is discovered.
If there is any focal deviation in the right and left centers, repeat Steps 1 and 2 until a good result is
obtained.
6) Adjust the focus in the upper and lower directions of the center by tilting the lens mount.
(Tilting is possible by tightening the hexagon head setscrews "C" on top surface of the base. There are two
setscrews in front and rear each.)

Front

om)

Left

1 Check the focus position in the top and bottom center parts of the projector screen.
2 Move the focus position to the front side so that the focus can be adjusted in the center of the screen.
(If the upper focus position comes to the front side, raise the rear side for adjustment. If the lower focus
position comes to the front side, raise the front side for adjustment.)
3 Recheck the upper and lower focus positions. Proceed to the next step if no problem is discovered.
If there is any focal deviation in vertical directions, repeat Steps 1 and 2 until a good result is obtained.

7) Tighten the lens mount setscrews A for fixing and confirm the focal conditions of the screen overall.
Proceed to the next step if no problem is discovered. If there is any focal deviation, loosen the setscrews A
and repeat Steps (5) and (6).
Caution: When tightening the screws, be careful not to change the projector screen position.

8) After screen adjustments (by tightening the setscrews A), tighten the hexagon head setscrews "B" and "C"
used to tilt the lens mount.
At that time, however, these screws should be tightened at a torque level that does not cause the projector
screen to move.

9) For the purpose of looseness inhibition, apply an adhesive agent to the setscrews (4 positions) and the
adjusting screws (6 positions).
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
7-52
 ADJUSTMENTS AND INSPECTIONS ATTRIBUTABLE TO THE REPLECEMENT OF ELECTRICAL AND OPTICAL PARTS

* Method of focal position check

Move a piece of white paper from the screen closer to the lens. If a correct focus is secured during this action,
the focal position can be found to stay in front.

 Cautions
• It is important for the optical axis that it comes at right angles with the screen.
The condition for securing the verticality of the optical axis is that the all-white screen comes in a rectangular
shape.
Adjustments in the right and left directions are possible by turning the main body. Adjustments in vertical
directions are possible by changing the foot height.
• The focus should be adjusted to secure overall balancing in a state that a black dot can be seen in the
center of the dot.

“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”

7-53
 ADJUSTMENTS AND INSPECTIONS ATTRIBUTABLE TO THE REPLECEMENT OF ELECTRICAL AND OPTICAL PARTS

Inspection at the time of Lens Mount replacement

A. Operation check for the Lens Shift Limit SW
Check the range of movements by Lens Shift operation. (Refer to B5-6. Lens Shift Operation.)

0.265V
(614[mm])

Projected image
1V = Image height

0.20V
(464[mm])

B. Lens Shift operation (Remote Controller operation)

1) When the following key operation is performed, the Lens Shift mode is assumed.
▲

CTL + : Screen is moved to the right.

+
▲

CTL : Screen is moved to the left.

CTL + ▲ : Screen is moved to the top.

CTL + ▼ : Screen is moved to the bottom.

CTL + ▲

Image
▼
▼

CTL + CTL +

CTL + ▼

“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”

7-54
 ADJUSTMENTS AND INSPECTIONS ATTRIBUTABLE TO THE REPLECEMENT OF ELECTRICAL AND OPTICAL PARTS

C. Operation check for the Focus Limit SW

1) Operation check
CTL Focus - buttons to move the lens mount to
In the Lens 0° position, keep pressing the +
(LENS)
prism side (inner side of the projector) and confirm the following items:
• Limit Switch A works and movement of the lens mount stops.
• The primary lens and the lens mount do not touch other parts.

D. Adjustment of the picture profile and the focus

1) Project a crosshatch screen of the test pattern at the screen and confirm the overall focus in the screen.
2) Project a raster 100% all-white screen of the test pattern and confirm that the screen is free from distortion.

“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”

7-55
 CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION

Circuit Operation of the CPU PWB PWC-4651

1. Power supply system
1 Power supply to the CPU PWB
The power supply to the CPU PWB is controlled by the POCP.
Pins 1 and 2 : +5V for standby ...................... D7603 (LED) is lit.
Pin 6 : +5V for main ........................... D7602 (LED) is lit.
The fuses (F7601, F7602) are mounted behind the respective pins of the connector. If the connector pins are
applied with a voltage but the above-mentioned LEDs are not lit, the related fuses may have blown out. Turn
off the power supply toward the CPU PWB and measure the resistance value between both ends of the
above-mentioned fuse by means of a circuit tester. If this section is found short-circuited, the fuse is normal.
If the measured value is found infinity, this fuse is then broken.

2 Standby power supply system

The standby power supply provides +5V and +3.3V.
Voltage +5V is fed from Pins 1 and 2 of the above-mentioned POCP. This voltage is used to drive the circuits
of peripheral boards that work at +5V and also used as the power supply for the I2C bus and buffer circuit to
be connected.
Voltage +3.3V is produced from +5V by the regulator of IC7604. Most circuits in the CPU PWB are driven at
this standby voltage of +3.3V.
Some devices are driven by another power supply obtained from +3.3V by the aid of the regulator IC.

3 Main power supply system

The main power supply also provides +5V and +3.3V.
This power supply is used for the interface circuits of the PWB that works on the main power supply system
when installed in the projector.
Voltage +5V is fed from Pin 6 of the POCP connector.
Voltage +3.3V is produced from +5V by the regulator of IC7604 and IC7606.

“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”

8-1
 CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION

2. Circuit operation
1 CPU circuit
• Power supply
The power supply toward the CPU (IC7002) is produced by the regulator.
Power supply (+3.3V) for CPU I/O pin: Produced from Standby +5V by IC7005.
Power supply (+1.2V) for CPU core: Produced from Standby +3.3V by IC7004.

• Reset
IC7000 is a circuit to control power voltage supervision and resetting. This circuit is used to supervise
Standby +3.3V that is the basis for the power supply of the CPU core. The CPU is reset if this voltage
becomes lower than +3.0V.
D7001 is unlit when the reset output is generated from IC7000. D7001 is lit when the reset condition is
canceled.

• Clock
X7001 is an oscillator of 12MHz. Based on this 12MHz, the CPU generates various clock signals in con-
junction with the PLL in the CPU. These signals are the main clock to be used inside the CPU, the bus
clock to access the peripheral devices, and so on.

• Program/Data memory
The firmware for CPU operation and the associated data are accommodated in the Flash ROM of IC7007
and IC7008. The respective ROM functions are specified below.
IC7007 : Storage area for BIOS and various data
IC7008 : Storage area for firmware
When the reset condition is canceled by IC7000 after the power supply has been turned ON, the CPU
firstly reads out the BIOS data of IC7007. It then starts up itself based on these data. After that, it reads out
the firmware data of IC7008. It operates while referring to the data of IC7007.
The adjusting values and such data are written in IC7007 for storage.
The serial number of the unit and information about the usage time are stored in the EEPROM of IC7003.

• Work memory
IC7006 is an SDRAM. It is used as a work area while the CPU is in operation.
The circuits between the CPU and the SDRAM are operated in synchronization with the bus clock of
133MHz.

“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”

8-2
 CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION

2 Peripheral chip set ASSIST III (IC7200)

This IC is connected to the local bus of the CPU. The power supply is 3.3V.
The clock signals needed to drive this IC are as specified below.
• 12MHz : Fed from X7001 for internal timing circuits
• 66MHz : Fed from the CPU for internal timing circuits
• 33MHz : Fed from X7200 for PCI buses
The following functions are available:
• PI/O (8-bit x 3 ports): Interface with the MOTOR PWB
• Fan revolution control and rpm measuring circuit : ed for liquid cooling pump control in NC2500C. In
NC800C, two fans are controlled for lamp cooling.
• Key matrix driver circuit : Pulse I/O toward the key matrix circuit of the KEY PWB.
• I2C bus circuit : Interface with the I2C bus and devices in other boards.
• PCI bus circuit : Connected with various interface circuits of the PC card and Ethernet. The clock signal
of the PCI bus is maintained at 3.3MHz.
• Remote control signal decoder circuit : Used for the decoding of wired and wireless remote control
signals.

3 PC card interface circuit IC7301

IC7301 is a PC card interface IC. It is connected to the PCI bus of the ASSIST III (IC7200). The CPU uses the
PCI bus of the ASSIST III and gains access to the PC card via this PC card interface IC.
The PC card socket M7300 is of the PCMCIA TYPE II and applicable to the Card Bus.

• Power supply
The power supply for IC7301 is +2.5V. This voltage is produced from Standby +3.3V by the regulator of
IC7300.
The power supply to be fed to the PC card is obtained through changeover between +5.0V and +3.3V. The
PC card inserted in the socket is detected by IC7301 to identify the applicable voltage to be supplied.
According to this identification, the required power voltage is selected by Q7307. While no PC card is
inserted, Q7307 stays in the OFF state and no power is fed to the socket.
Standby +5.0V is fed to the +5.0V card. For the +3.3V card, the 3.3V power is produced from Standby
+5.0V by the regulator of IC7303.

• D7300 is lit up when the PC card is accessed.

4 Ethernet interface circuit

For the Ethernet interface circuit, two circuits are installed in this PWB.
IC7400, M7400 (for local network) : Connected to the MM (Multimedia Switcher) and the touch panel via
the ETHER PWB (Hub) in the projector. Used for communication with
these devices.
IC7500, M7500 (for global network) : Connected to the ETHER PWB (Hub) in the projector. This port is
used to establish a LAN with external devices.

Both of these two circuits are applicable to the 10Base-T / 100Base-TX UTP (Unshielded Twist Pair cable).
In addition, the MAC address and the IP address are set up individually for each port.
MAC address : 6 bytes of XX XX XX XX XX XX
00 30 13 1f 00 01 ~ Used for manufacturing in Japan
00 30 13 1f 08 01 ~ Used for manufacturing in China

Local network port (IC7400, M7400)

IC7400 is a PCI bus, which is connected to the ASSIST III (IC7200). IC7400 is fed power of the two systems;
Standby +3.3V and +2.5V that is generated by the regulator IC7300.
A 25MHz quartz crystal oscillator of X7400 is used to generate the clock signals for internal driving in the
Ethernet interface circuit. The setup values for the operation mode of IC7400 and the MAC address values
are stored in the EEPROM IC7401.
Using the PCI bus of the ASSIST III, the CPU performs data exchange with this Ethernet port.
Connector M7400 is of the RJ-45 type and has a built-in transformer.

“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”

8-3
 CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION

This port is used as a communication port with the MM (Multimedia Switcher) and the touch panel.
The MAC address is written in while PWB assembly is carried out at the factory. As a barcode label, the
written values are attached around the rear side of the connector M7400 on the PWB.
Since this is an exclusive communication port with optional devices of the projector, a local default value is
set up for the IP address.

Global network port (IC7500, M7500)

IC7500 is also a PCI bus, which is connected to the ASSIST III (IC7200). IC7500 is fed power of the two
systems; Standby +3.3V and +2.5V that is generated by the regulator IC7300.
A 25MHz quartz crystal oscillator of X7500 is used to generate the clock signals for internal driving in the
Ethernet interface circuit. The setup values for the operation mode of IC7500 and the MAC address values
are stored in the EEPROM IC7501.
Using the PCI bus of the ASSIST III, the CPU performs data exchange with this Ethernet port.
Connector M7500 is of the RJ-45 type and has a built-in transformer.
This port is used as a communication port with the MM (Multimedia Switcher) and the touch panel.
The MAC address is written in while PWB assembly is carried out at the factory. As a barcode label, the
written values are attached around the rear side of the connector M7500 on the PWB.
The devices to be connected to this port can be a PC, a video server, and the like. IP address setup is made
at the time of shipment, but such setting can be made according to the working environment of the system
and the network where this projector is used.

5 USB interface circuit

The USB interface circuit is of the A type and its connector is M7401. It is connected to the USB interface pin
of the CPU (IC7002) via the transformer T7401.
As a power supply for the connector M7401, +5.0V is fed through IC7402. The CPU controls IC7402 so that
the +5.0V power can be fed to and removed from the connector M7401. If a current of over 1A is carried
through the connector M7402 from the +5.0V power supply, IC7402 functions to suspend the supply of this
+5.0V power. (In this case, the current protection circuit is actuated.)

6 Wired remote control circuit

Connector M7800 is a connecting connector for the wired remote control circuit. The power supply for the
remote control circuit is gained from Pin 2 of this connector at +4.0V. This voltage is obtained from Standby
+5.0V with the aid of the regulator IC7801. When the remote control circuit is connected with the connector
M7800 through a remote control cable of 16 meters long, the voltage is maintained at approximately 3.3V on
the remote control side.
Pin 3 of the connector M7800 is an input terminal for the remote control signals. The remote control signals
are gained at +5.0Vp-p on this PWB and processed for waveform shaping and level conversion at Q7806
and Q7808. When the signals are converted into +3.3Vp-p, they are entered in the remote control signal
decoder circuit of the ASSIST III (IC7200).
In the ASSIST III (IC7200), the entered remote control signals are decoded by hardware. Only when remote
control signals are identified as normal, the information about the entry of a remote control input is transmit-
ted from the ASSIST III (IC7200) to the CPU. If the input signals are identified as abnormal in the ASSIST III
(IC7200), the information about the decoded signals is not transmitted to the CPU.
Pin 1 of the connector M7800 is maintained at the GND potential.

7 PC control interface M7700

Connector M7700 is an RS-232C port. It is used for communication with external devices. If it is connected
with a PC, a D-Sub 9-pin cable in straight connection is used.
Switch S7700 is a changeover switch used to select the destination of connection for the connector M7700.
This switch is of the Push & Lock type.
When the S7700 is pressed ON, the communication line of M7700 is connected to the RS-232C driver /
receiver of IC7702. It is then connected to the serial communication port (UART) of the CPU (IC7002).
If the S7700 is not pressed ON, the communication line of M7700 is connected to the connector POCT.
When it is incorporated in the projector, it is connected to D-Sub 9-pin of the mother board in the POCT
Sinama circuit.

“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”

8-4
 CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION

8 External control
Connector POCO is a connector to make a connection with the GPIO PWB. When a control signal input is
transmitted from D-Sub Pin 37 of the GPIO terminal in the projector, it is converted into a signal maintained
at the LVTTL level via the photo coupler of the GPIO PWB. The converted signal is then entered in Pins 1 ~
7 of this POCO. This signal input passes through the buffer logic IC7800 and is entered in the PI/O circuit of
the CPU.
The CPU periodically supervises the status of this input and takes a variety of actions according to the status
of input; such as power supply startup, signal changeover, and so on.
Pins 9 ~ 14 of Connector POCO are used to supply the potential data of GND and Standby +5.0V to actuate
the photo coupler of the GPIO PWB.

3. Setup
1 DIP switches
Two DIP switches (S7200 and S7600) are allocated on the PWB. Each has the functions as described below.
• S7200 (4p)
This switch is used for hardware debugging. In ordinary usage, it should be set at the OFF side. If it is
carelessly set at the ON side in the middle of ordinary usage, the PWB cannot operate normally.

• S7600 (2p)
This switch is used for hardware debugging. In ordinary usage, it should be set at the OFF side. If it is
carelessly set at the ON side in the middle of ordinary usage, the PWB cannot operate normally.

“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”

8-5
 CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION

4. List of Major Bus Functions

IC7000 : BD4730G Power supervision and reset control

IC7002 : S3C2440A-400 CPU
IC7005 : PQ070XZ01ZPH CPU 3.3V power regulator for I/O
IC7004 : PQ015YZ01ZPH CPU 1.2V power regulator for core
X7001 : 12M-SG8002JFPCC 12MHz oscillator Main clock for CPU•ASSIST III
IC7003 : HN58X2432T1 EEPROM Usage time, serial No., lens memory data storage
D7001 : LED Reset status display to the CPU
D7002 : LED Reset output status display to the CPU
IC7006 : K4S561632E SDRAM CPU work area
IC7007 : Flash ROMO CPU’s BIOS, data storage area
IC7008 : Flash ROM1 CPU’s program area
IC7010 : RTC-8564JE RTC
IC7100 : 74LVC08APW Decoder for bus and buffer control signals
IC7101, IC7102 : 74LCX16245MTDX Data•bus•buffer
IC7103, IC7104 : 74LCX16245MTDX Address•bus•buffer
IC7200 : S1L53354 (ASSIST III) CPU aux. Function IC
X7200 : 33M-SG8002JFSCC 33MHz oscillator For CPI bus clock
IC7201 : NC7WB66K8X Analog switch Main power switching for I2C BUS1 (5V system) of ASSIST
IC7202 : NC7WB66K8X Analog switch Main power switching for I2C BUS2 (3.3V system) of ASSIST
IC7301 : R5C485-LCFP144 PCMCIA/Card bus Interface IC
D7300 : LED Display of PC card access status
IC7300 : PQ070XZ01ZPH 2.5V power regulator for PC card interface IC (IC7301)
IC7303 : PQ070XZ01ZPH 3.3V power regulator for PC card connector (M7300)
Q7303 : SI4963GY PC card power selector (3.3V/5.0V) changeover circuit
IC7400 : RTL8100CL-LF Local LAN of Ethernet interface IC
IC7401 : Serial EEPROM Setup data storage for Ethernet interface IC
IC7402 : Power switch for USB DC 5V
IC7500 : RTL8100CL-LF Global LAN of Ethernet interface IC
IC7401 : Serial EEPROM Setup data storage for Ethernet interface IC
IC7602 : 74LVC245APW DIV PWB interface for NC800C Error detection input buffer
IC7604 : PQ070XH02ZP Regulator for Standby +3.3V power supply
IC7605 : PQ070XZ01ZPH Regulator for Main +3.3V power supply
D7602 : LED For Main +5.0V power check. Usually lit during operation
D7603 : LED For Standby +5.0V power check. Usually lit during operation
S7700 : RS-232C changeover switch Selection of the connecting destination for M7700 (RS-232C)
by means of the NEC CPU/TI circuit.
IC7700 : ADM3202ARNZ RS-232C interface IC For internal NEC ↔ TI communication
IC7702 : ADM3202ARNZ RS-232C interface IC For external ↔ NEC/TI communication
IC7703 : ADM3202ARNZ RS-232C interface IC For CPU ↔ Lamp source communication

“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”

8-6
 CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION

Connectors:
POCD1, POCD2 : Debugging connectors (for engineer)
M7300 : PCMCIA TYPE II card connector Applicable to card•bus
M7401 : USB connector Type-A
M7400 : RJ45 Connector for Ethernet local Transformer incorporated
M7500 : RJ45 Connector for Ethernet local Transformer incorporated
POIF : KEY PWB interface
POCK : DIV PWB interface for NC800C Error detection input
POCE : DIV PWB interface for NC2500C
PODM : DIV PWB interface for NC800C Fan control I/O
POFA : DIV PWB interface for NC800C Fan revolutions detection input
POUL : DIV PWB interface for NC800C Power•lamp control
PON8 : TI MOTHER PWB interface Transmission of commands to the TI circuit (RS-232C),
RESETZ output
POCT : TI MOTHER PWB interface External RS-232C port with the TI circuit
M7700 : D-Sub Pin 9 RS-232C interface with external devices
POSIO : RS-232C interface For future extension
POCI : Lamp power control interface RS-232C, lamp startup signal, interlock detection input
POCO : GPIO PWB interface External control input
M7800 : Wired remote control signal input
POTY : DIVIOUT PWB interface for NC2500S
POCM : MM2000B control interface for NC2500S
PODM : MOTHER PWB interface
POCF : DIV PWB interface for NC2500S Photo sensor, error detection port control

“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”

8-7
 CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION

GPIO PWB PWC-4649E Circuit Operation

This PWB has two major functions. Firstly, this PWB extends the GPIO (D-Sub 37-pin) connector of the mother
board in the cinema signal processor circuit from the projector interior to the terminal panel located on the side
surface. Secondly, it distributes the input signal line of the GPIO terminal to the CPU PWB.
M9501 on the PWB is an interface used to control the projector with the aid of external equipment or control the
external equipment from the projector. It is provided with eight input ports and eight output ports. The internal
circuits are designed so that they can be interrupted electrically from the outside by the photo coupler.

1. Factors related to the power supply

1 The power supply to the PWB is maintained through:
POCO
Pins 12, 13, and 14: +5V for standby
Pins 9, 10, and 11: GND
The POCO connector is connected to the CPU PWB from which the power is distributed.
This power supply is connected to the mother board of the cinema signal processor circuit through Connector
PO6005 on the PWB. It is used to drive the input section of the photo coupler in the cinema interface board.

“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”

8-8
 CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION

2. Circuit operation
1 Connector M9501
1) Input terminal
These connector pins specified below are used as the input pins. They are connected to the photo coupler on
the PWB.
• Input Pin 1 ~ Pin 8 (anodes of the photo coupler): Ext_GPIO_P
• Input Pin 20 ~ Pin 27 (cathodes of the photo coupler): Ext_GPIO_N

GPI/O terminal Projector interior

Resistance =390Ω

Ext_GPIN_P

Pin No. : 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Recommended operating current: 5mA
Absolute max. rating: 50mA

Ext_GPIN_N

Pin No. : 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
Photo coupler
Voltage in forward direction: 1.1V (@5mA)

As described above, there are circuits connected with the diodes of Photo Coupler IC9501 ~ IC9508 between
Ext_GPIN_P and Ext_GPIN_N. There are eight such circuits available in all.
When a voltage is applied between Ext_GPIN_P and Ext_GPIN_N, the photo coupler diode can be turned
ON and OFF.
Usually, Connector M9501 is in OPEN state. Therefore, the photo coupler remains to be turned OFF.
The voltage to be applied between Ext_GPIN_P and Ext_GPIN_N to get the photo coupler turned ON should
be kept between DC 3.3V ~ DC 10V. If this voltage is lower than DC 3.3V, the photo coupler cannot be turned
ON, thus failing in operation. If a voltage higher than DC 10V is applied, the photo coupler can be destroyed.
This voltage should be maintained at a positive potential (+) on the Ext_GPIN_P side (Pin 1 ~ Pin 8 side) and
at a negative potential (–) on the Ext_GPIN_N side (Pin 20 ~ Pin 27 side). A resistor of 390Ω is inserted in
series on the photo coupler diode side.
When a current of 5mA is carried through this diode, the forward voltage of the diode becomes 1.1V.
The signal input entered from this circuit is picked up from the collector of the output side transistor in the
photo coupler. This signal input is divided into two portions. One is led to the Cinema System circuit
(INTERFACE Board) through Connector PO60D5 and the other is applied to the CPU PWB via the POCO.

“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”

8-9
 CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION

GPIO setup
As described previously, the signal from this input terminal is applied in parallel to the Cinema circuit and the
CPU circuit. This signal input is used for functional setup for the projector by making GPIO setup.
When the GPIO terminal setup for the projector is based on the SYSTEM/CINEMA, the system control
microprocessor on the CPU PWB functions to detect an input signal of the eight systems in order to set up an
external control function so that power supply ON/OFF, dowser ON/OFF, and title changeover can be carried
out.
If the GPIO terminal setup for the projector is based on the CINEMA, the microprocessor on the CPU PWB
disregards the input signal of the eight systems and the external control function becomes unavailable.

The input signal entered in the Cinema circuit (INTERFACE Board) is always maintained irrespective of the
condition of the projector’s GPIO setup. Therefore, when microprogram setup is made for the Cinema circuit,
this signal can be used as a direct control input fed to the Cinema circuit.

2) Output terminal
The output terminals are arranged as specified below.
• Output: Pin 9 ~ Pin 16 (Photo coupler anode): Ext_GPOUT_P
• Output: Pin 28 ~ Pin 35 (Photo coupler cathode): Ext_GPOUT_N
The internal circuit for these terminals is arranged as illustrated below. Terminals of Ext_GPOUT_P and
those of Ext_GPOUT_N are combined to make up eight sets of terminals in all, each set being a combination
of terminals with smaller pin numbers.

GPI/O terminal Projector interior

Ext_GPOUT_P

Pin No. : 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

Absolute max. rating: 50mA

Ext_GPOUT_N
Pin No. : 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
Photo coupler

The photo coupler in the above illustration is intended for use in output circuitry, actually installed in the
INTERFACE Board of the Cinema circuit.
It is not for IC9501 ~ IC9508 on this GPIO PWB.
When these terminals are used, a DC power supply (+) should be applied to the terminal side of Ext_GPOUT_P
and a DC power supply (-) or GND should be applied to the terminal side of Ext_GPOUT_N. For the limitation
of current between power supply or GND and terminals, a resistor should be connected in series so that the
collector current of the photo coupler transistor cannot exceed the absolute maximum rating (50mA).
If this resistor is omitted, a heavy current may be carried between the collector and the emitter of the transistor
when the photo coupler is turned ON, thus giving rise to destruction in the photo coupler.
This output terminal provides an output generated from the Cinema circuit (INTERFACE Board). Contents of
this output (H/L logic, output timing) can be set up with the microprogram for the Cinema circuit.
This output signal is used when control timing pulses, etc. are generated for the right/left eye LCD shutter
and others at the time of Active 3D System structuring.

2 Connector PO6005
This connector is connected to D-Sub Pin 37 of the Mother Board in the Cinema circuit.
Various I/O signals are applied under the control from the above-mentioned circuit.

3 Connector POCO
This connector is used to apply signals of projector’s input terminal M9501 to the CPU PWB.

“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”

8-10
 CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION

Description of Operation of the ETHER Board Circuit

This board is an 8-Port switching hub for 100BASE-TX and 10BASE-T.

1. VLAN
By the use of VLAN function of IC8300 (RTL8309SB) the board can function as 2-system switching hub,
each system having 4 independent ports.
Group A: M8501-M8504
Group B: M8505-M8507
Connection can freely made between each port within the groups; however, communication between the
groups is impossible.
This function can be set by the set data in EEPROM-IC8503(BR24C02) at the time of reset.
The board that permits communication between Groups A-B, therefore, cannot be set correctly from IC8503.
(IC8300 at default permits 8-port full communication.)

2. Auto MDI/MDI-X
This board can automatically detect the difference between straight and cross cables and switch between
them. Thus, twisted-pair cables to be connected can be any kind.

3. Power supply
As a power supply 5 volts is supplied from DIV PWB via connector POLAN (S2B-PH).
In IC8501 (PQ070XH02ZPH) 5 volts is regulated to 3.3 volts which is then supplied to IC8300 (RTL8309SB)
and IC8503 (BR24C02).
In IC8502 (PQ070XH02ZPH) 3.3 volts is regulated to 1.8 volt which is supplied to IC8300 (RTL8309SB).

“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”

8-11
 CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION

PJKEY PWB Circuit Operation

1 Key
Make connections for thirty keys on the board and the 4x5 key matrix of the CPU PWB.
In the case of the 4x5 key matrix, only twenty keys are simply available. For this reason, part of the key matrix
is utilized by making changeover through the combination (double pressing) of the three CTL keys specified
below.
LENS CTL (the CTL key to operate the lens and its related circuits)
MACRO CTL (the CTL key for macro-changeover)
LAMP CTL (the CTL key to operate the lamp output circuit)
This key matrix changeover is performed by hardware and is therefore exclusive.
The backlight is also lit up at the same time for the keys that become available as a result of this key matrix
changeover.

2 Backlight ON/OFF
Using the slide SW, ON/OFF operation for the backlight is carried out for the keys inclusive of the LCD.
This operation is also synchronized with the LIGHT1 PWB for KEY PWB lighting and the LIGHT2 PWB for
terminal block lighting.
In regard to the CTL keys, the backlight is kept unlit for the invalid keys even though the backlight for the
other keys is turned ON.

3 Memory
A 4K-byte E2ROM is installed, that is connected with the CPU PWB through I2C.
This memory is used to accommodate information that is singular to the set, such as data of serial number,
etc.
Similar memories are also installed in the CPU PWB and the PJDIV PWB. Even though either board of the
two should be replaced, it is possible to maintain the above-mentioned information.

4 IR light receiver
An IR light receiver block is provided for wireless remote operation.
This light receiver block is, however, disabled in the wired remote mode.

“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”

8-12
 CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION

MOTOR PWB Circuit Operation

The MOTHER PWB offers the following functions:
1 Mother Driver for five systems
(Shift Up/Down, Shift Right/Left, Zoom In/Out, Focus +/–, and Shutter Open/Close)
2 Detection of mechanical limits
3 Detection of Zoom and Focus positions
4 Detection of lens ID

1. Mother Driver
The basic circuits for the five systems are the same as each other. Each circuit is composed of the Driver IC
(BA6285FP).
#17 and #19 of the IC are the control pins. Normally, both pins are maintained at the H level (5V) and either
pin is turned L (0V) during operation.
Pin #20 is used to control the output voltage. This voltage is kept at approximately 11V in the fast speed
mode. It is maintained at about 6.5V in the normal speed mode. (For the shutter block, 12V is always applied
and there is no modal changeover.) An overcurrent protector is provided to each IC so that excessive currents
are never carried even in the case of abnormality such as a motor failure or the like.

2. Detection of mechanical limits

The motor moving sections of the lens mount and the zoom lens are respectively provided with the end
sensor switches at their both ends. In the case of deviation from the operating range, motion of the motor
drive is suspended.

3. Detection of Zoom and Focus positions

Zoom and Focus are respectively provided with the variable resistors with which the position data are converted
into voltage signals. A 10-bit A/D decoder is used to decode the converted voltage signals into the binary
codes.

4. Detection of lens ID
The lens is provided with a 3-bit ID. If this ID is detected and the installed lens has no zoom function like the
fixed lens, the zoom function is disabled according to the preset processing conditions.

“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”

8-13
 CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION

EFIB PWB Circuit Operation

1 FPGA
The RGB data input entered via the Mother Board is chopped for buffering by the aid of the clock signal and
the generated output is sent to the Formatter circuit.
When the DVI input (NON-CINEMA mode) is available, functions of color correction and gamma correction
are actuated to reproduce the same color as that of cinema.

2 Flash memory
FPGA operating program incorporated

3 Power block
There are provisions of a 1.8V regulator for the FPGA core power supply and a 2.5V regulator for the respective
power supplies of Formatter Board R, G, and B.

“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”

8-14
 CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION

MOTHER Board Circuit Operation

MOTHER Board configuration

HD-SDI connectors 2
DVI connectors 2
GP I/O connector 1
RS232C connector D-SUB 9-pin 1
RS232C connector EH 9-pin 1
LAN connector 1
Connector for TI processor board
Connector for TII/F board
Connector for formatter interface board
Power connectors 3.3V, 5V, and 12V

Operation
This is a board used to relay the external interface connector signals to the TI Board.

“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”

8-15
 CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION

FMB PWB Circuit Operation

1. FIB PWB Interface
This interface is connected to the board of R, G, and B respectively. Connections for data are separated from
those for the power supply.
Board R data (J8, J11), power supply (J5)
Board G data (J7, J10), power supply (J4)
Board B data (J6, J9), power supply (J3)
For data, inputs of RGB, CLK, control signals, and I2C signals are entered.
For the power supply, 5V, 3.3V, and 2.5V are used.

2. Digital signal processor

The DDP1000 performs data conversion so that the entered RGB signal input is converted to enable the
DMD chip to be driven adequately and the converted signal output can be sent to the DMD chip.
During the above-mentioned signal conversion, gamma correction, contrast correction, and color conversion
are carried out.
At the same time, the DMD chip, voltage converter IC, and the DAD1000 are controlled.

3. Flash ROM interface

Outputs of address bus, data bus, and control signals are generated from the DDP1000.
The clock signals pass through the clock driver and are fed to the DRAM for the frame memory.

4. DMD reset
Outputs of DMD reset voltage/signal and power supply voltages are generated from the DAD1000.
This circuit receives the control signals from the DDP1000 to produce the reset voltages (±26V). The generated
reset signal output is transferred to the DMD chip.

5. Power supply
Voltages of 5V, 3.3V, and 2.5V are supplied from the FIB PWB.
In addition to the reset voltages, the DAD1000 supplies the voltages of 5V to 12V and 7.5V to the DMD chip.

6. DMD control
IS8 controls the right and left DMD chips of 2048*1080, independently of each other.
For this purpose, the above-mentioned DDP1000/ Flash ROM/ DAD1000/ and RDRAM are respectively
provided with two circuits of the same configuration.

“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”

8-16
 CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION

Interface PWB Circuit Operation

1 Cinema circuit control
This block involves the CPU and memory circuit inside so that the setup data related to cinema (color setup/
definition change setup/ signal select information) can be stored in the internal memory.

When the cinema setup data are called up from the CPU PWB on NEC side through the RS232C, the signal
changeover and color setup data are converted and transmitted to the Processor, EFIB, and Formatter
boards.

2 Video signal conversion

The HDSDI signals (2 ports) and the DVI signals (2 ports) are received and converted into the parallel
signals.
The converted signals are transferred to the PROCESSOR Board via the MOTHER Board.

3 Communication interface
The LAN/ RS232C/ GPIO signals are received via the MOTHER Board so that external control can be
carried out.

“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”

8-17
 CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION

PROCESSOR Board Circuit Operation

1 Cinema signal conversion
Based on the setup data, the video signal input entered from the INTERFACE Board is used for signal
processing such as color correction, gamma correction, and others.

“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”

8-18
 CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION

DIV Board Circuit Operation

1 Power interface
The various power outputs obtained from the power supply are fed to the respective boards in the set.
CPU : 5V (S), 5V, 3.3V
MOTHER : 3.3V, 5V, 12V
MOTOR : 12V
FAN : 24V, 5V, 5V (S)
TIMER : 5V (S)
SENSOR : 12V/–5V
2 Fan circuit
A voltage (24V) is fed to the fan in the set.
The OR circuit of the protector is incorporated. This circuit functions when the fan becomes faulty.
A pulse input for the DC/DC converter is obtained from the CPU board so that the fan voltage can be
regulated for the lamp.
3 A/D conversion of the sensor output
The optical sensor signal from the Sensor board is processed for A/D conversion.
The result of conversion is sent to the CPU with the aid of the I2C controller.
4 POWERGOOD signal generation
Signals of power supervision and the ON/OFF signals from the CPU are assembled to establish a
POWERGOOD signal.
5 Various interfaces
The signals of power ON/OFF and lamp ON/OFF are transmitted from the CPU to the power supply.
To record the lamp usage time, an interface for I2C control is used between the Timer board and the CPU
board.
The lamp temperature sensor signal is transmitted from the CPU to the power supply.
The protector data from the power supply are transmitted to the CPU board.

“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”

8-19
 CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION

SENSOR Board Circuit Operation

1 Lamp brightness measurement
A hole is produced in the optical engine block and the leakage light of the optical output from the lamp is
sensed with the photo diode D5301. The obtained signal is amplified at IC5301 and transmitted to the FAN
board.
After this value is put into A/D conversion in the Fan board, Lamp Auto setup is carried out based on the
resultant value.

“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”

8-20
 CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION

FAN Board Circuit Operation

1 Fan circuit
The fan is driven at the voltage (24V) supplied from the DIV board.
An OR circuit is installed for the protector that operates when the fan becomes faulty.
Error data are transferred to the DIV board.
2 DMD temperature sensing function
The resistance value of the thermistor, which is mounted on the DMD mounting metal fittings, is sensed by
the comparator IC. If there is any thermal error, information about this thermal error is transmitted to the DIV
board.

“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”

8-21
 CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION

Lamp TIMER Board Circuit Operation

1. Recording of the lamp usage time
Under the control through the I2C bus, the lamp usage time is recorded in IC9001 (EEPROM: BR24L32F-
W).
At the time of starting, the CPU reads out the lamp usage time that has been written in IC9001 via the I2C
bus. If the lamp usage time is examined and found not to have exceeded the specified time, the lamp is lit
and the lamp's lighting time is added to the value that is stored in the EEPROM.
Recording of the added time in the EEPROM is effected while the lamp is unlit.
If the lamp usage time recorded in the EEPROM should have exceeded the specified time, this situation is
identified as an error and an alarm indication is given to the LCD panel and the Status LED.
This alarm is given when the lamp usage time has attained 1000 hours.

“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”

8-22
 CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION

Power Supply Circuit Operation

Ballast power supply (KSX-1250NEVT)

When the LAMPBIT signal from the Fan board becomes low, this power supply sends out a signal to the igniter
(SS-50MPNE) to generate a high voltage between the electrodes of the lamp, so that the lamp can be lit up.
After the completion of starting, an output of about 50A and 25V (1.25kW) is supplied.
If any error occurs in the lamp power supply or in the lamp itself, the LPSPROTECT output is sent to the DIV
board CPU to display an error code.

DC standby power supply

When the AC SW is turned ON, an output of 5V (S) is generated to the DIV board.

DC main power supply

When POWERBIT is turned ON from the DIV board in the standby state, the following outputs are fed to the DIV
board:
3.3V, 5V, 9V, 12V, and 24V

Outputs of 3.3V and 5V are processed with a voltage feedback via the Mother board and the DIV board.

A protector circuit is accommodated in the main unit of the power supply.

An operation error in the power supply fan is transmitted via the Fan board and an error code is displayed.
This power supply can be started while each output circuit is in the no-load condition. Therefore, in the case of
an error in the power supply, the power circuit can be checked by disconnecting the output terminals and
examining the voltage at each output terminal.

CPU : 5V (S)
TI board : 3.3V, 5V, and 12V
FAN : 24V, 5V, and 5V (S)
MOTOR board : 12V
SENSOR : 12V/-5V

“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”

8-23
 ASSEMBLY DIAGRAM

Assembly Diagram 1 PWB

Diagram symbol Circuit symbol Part name Part number Q’ty Remarks

PWB1 DIV_PWB PWB ASSY 81L23K01 1 Use wrist strap

PWB2 KEY_PWB PWB ASSY 81L23H01 1 Use wrist strap

Board splitting is performed.

Hatched areas are abolished.

This section is not used.

DIV PWB ASSY

FAN PWB(PWC-4603B) FAN PWB (PWC-4603D)

RELAY PWB (PWC-4603E) I/O PWB (PWC-4603G)

SENSOR PWB (PWC-4603H)

C PWB (PWC-4603C)

MD CN PWB (PWC-4603T) IR1 PWB (PWC-4603L)

IF-TIMER PWB (PWC-4603J) IR2 PWB (PWC-4603R) COVER PWB (PWC-4603U)

DIV PWB (PWC-4603A)

KEY PWB ASSY

DIV PWB(PWC-4604B)

AC PWB(PWC-4604C)

FMT-IC2 PWB(PWC-4604H)
KEY PWB (PWC-4604A)

“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”

9-1
 ASSEMBLY DIAGRAM

Assembly Diagram 2 PWB (2)

Diagram symbol Circuit symbol Part name Part number Q’ty Remarks

PWB1 ETC1_PWB PWB ASSY 81L23Z01 1 Use wrist strap

Board splitting is performed.

The hatched area is abolished.

This section is not used.

ETC1 PWB ASSY

L-SENS PWB(PWC-4649D)

PJKEY PWB(PWC-4649A)

LIGHT PWB(PWC-4649C)

GPIO PWB(PWC-4649E)
ETHER PWB(PWC-4649B)

GPIO JIG PWB(PWC-4649F)

“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”

9-2
 ASSEMBLY DIAGRAM

Assembly Diagram 3 Bottom1

Diagram symbol Circuit symbol Part name Part number Q’ty Remarks

PRT1 CHASSIS BASE ASSY 24HS3722 1

PRT2 SIDE PLATE R 24H49971 1

PRT3 SIDE PLATE L 24H51801 1

SRW001 PL-CPIMS*4*10*3KF 24V00461 7 Torque : 12~14kg•cm

SRW002 PL-CPIMS*4*10*3KF 24V00461 7 Torque : 12~14kg•cm

Mount the side panels R/L on the chassis base ASSY.

PRT3
PRT2

SRW001 SRW002
SRW001 2 positions
Side plane 2 positions SRW002
PRT1
in 5 positions Side plane
in 5 positions

LENS side

SRW001
Side plane PRT3
in 5 positions

SRW001 PRT2
SRW002
Side plane Side plane
in 5 positions in 5 positions

“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”

9-3
 ASSEMBLY DIAGRAM

Assembly Diagram 4 Bottom2

Diagram symbol Circuit symbol Part name Part number Q’ty Remarks

PRT1 FIXING PLATE (FL) 24H51764 1

PRT2 FIXING PLATE(FR) 24H51774 1

PRT3 FIXING PLATE(RL) 24H51784 1

PRT4 FIXING PLATE(RR) 24H51794 1

SRW132 SPECIAL SCREW(M5*35) 24N07342 4 Torque :16~18kg•cm

SRW133 SPECIAL SCREW(M5*35) 24N07342 4 Torque : 16~18kg•cm

SRW134 SPECIAL SCREW(M5*35) 24N07342 4 Torque : 16~18kg•cm

SRW135 SPECIAL SCREW(M5*35) 24N07342 3 Torque : 16~18kg•cm

Mount the fixing plate on the side panel.

PRT2
PRT1

SRW132 SRW133

A step is here!

LENS side
LENS side

Make sure not to confuse because the shape of the

fixing plate (FL) and that of the fixing plate (FR) resemble
each other.
The side with a step corresponds to (FR).

PRT4

PRT3

SRW134

SRW135

“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”

9-4
 ASSEMBLY DIAGRAM

Assembly Diagram 5 Foot

Diagram symbol Circuit symbol Part name Part number Q’ty Remarks

PRT1 Foot 24F33832 4

PRT2 Handle 24BS7212 2

SRW063 SCREW,PL-CPIMS*4*10*3KF 24V00461 12 Torque : 12~14kg•cm

SRW064 PL-CPIMS*4*25*15KF 24V00601 12 Torque : 12~14kg•cm

Reverse the SET.

Mount the feet and the handles.
After the completion of mounting, reverse the SET again.

PRT2

PRT1 PRT1

SRW064
SRW064 3 positions each
3 positions each

SRW063
3 positions each

PRT2

PRT1 PRT1

When mounting the handle,

treat the panel carefully not
to hurt it.

“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”

9-5
 ASSEMBLY DIAGRAM

Assembly Diagram 6 Foot (2)

Diagram symbol Circuit symbol Part name Part number Q’ty Remarks

PRT1 L ANGLE 24H51982 8

SRW061 SCR (HHCS*6*16) 24N07562 16 Torque : 16~18kg•cm

PRT2 COVER (S) 24P04281 3

SRW062 SCR (HHCS*6*16) 24N07562 6 Torque : 16~18kg•cm

Mount the L angle/Gromet/Cover on the SET.

SRW061
2 pcs.

SRW061
2 pcs.

SRW062 PRT2
2 pcs. PRT1
4 positions

SRW061
2 pcs.

SRW061
2 pcs.

SRW061
2 pcs.

SRW061
2 pcs.

SRW062 PRT2
2 pcs. SRW062
PART1 PRT2
4 positions 2 pcs.

SRW061
2 pcs.

SRW061
2 pcs.

“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”

9-6
 ASSEMBLY DIAGRAM

Assembly Diagram 7 Notch Filter

Diagram symbol Circuit symbol Part name Part number Q’ty Remarks

ENG ENGINE ASSY(NC800) 24BS7681 1

FILT NOTCH FILTER(IS8) 12JS7471 1

Remove the notch filter mounting block from the engine ASSY.
Remove the filter holder and fix the notch filter. Mount it on the engine.

Remove the screw

and take out the
filter mounting block.

Remove the screws from the filter fixing block and put the filter to fasten it with screws.
Mount the assembled body on the engine.

Tightening torque for the filter fixing block: 1.5 ~ 2.0kg•cm

Tightening torque for the filter mounting block: 1.8 ~ 2.5kg•cm

Remove the screws in

3 positions from the
filter mounting block.

FILT

“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”

9-7
 ASSEMBLY DIAGRAM

Assembly Diagram 8 Engine

Diagram symbol Circuit symbol Part name Part number Q’ty Remarks

ENG ENGINE ASSY(NC800) 24BS7681 1

SRW113 SPECIAL SCREW(M5*16) 24N07322 9 Torque : 16~18kg•cm

Put the engine ASSY on the chassis base.

Install the connector that is attached to the engine Assy, and also the lens presser knob.
Put the engine Assy for positioning and fasten it by means of screws. (There shall be no clearance between the jig and the engine.)
After screw fastening, remove the lamp positioning jig.

ENG

Lamp positioning jig

SRW113
6 positions

SRW113
3 positions

“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”

9-8
 ASSEMBLY DIAGRAM

Assembly Diagram 9 Engine-fan

Diagram symbol Circuit symbol Part name Part number Q’ty Remarks

FAN FAN MOTOR D07F-24SG19B 3N170078 1

RPT1 BRACKET(D07F) 24H51851 1

SRW118 PL-CPIMS*4*50*3KF 24V00531 2 Torque : 12~14kg•cm

SRW009 PL-CPIMS*4*10*3KF 24V00461 2 Torque : 12~14kg•cm

Mount the DC fan on the bracket and install the assembly on the chassis base.

FAN PRT1

SRW118

Put the label plane to

face the outside.

SRW009

“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”

9-9
 ASSEMBLY DIAGRAM

Assembly Diagram 10 Plate (Lamp)

Diagram symbol Circuit symbol Part name Part number Q’ty Remarks

PRT1 PLATE(LMP) 24J24362 2

SRW013 PL-CPIMS*3*12*3KF 24V00121 4 Torque : 5~7kg•cm

PRT2 BRACKET(LMP)L 24H50121 1

PRT3 BRACKET(LMP)R 24H50131 1

SRW014 PL-CPIMS*4*10*3KF 24V00461 2 Torque : 12~14kg•cm

SRW015 PL-CPIMS*4*10*3KF 24V00461 2 Torque : 12~14kg•cm

Mount the holder and fixing bracket on the chassis base.

* Pay attention to the mounting posture because PRT2/-RT3 can be installed reversely.

SRW013
4 positions

SRW014
2 positions SRW015
2 positions

PRT3
PRT2 PRT1

“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”

9-10
 ASSEMBLY DIAGRAM

Assembly Diagram 11 Lamp fan1

Diagram symbol Circuit symbol Part name Part number Q’ty Remarks

PRT1 PARTITION BOARD (LAMP) ASSY 24HS3761 1

PRT2 EDGE SADDLE 25283461 1

FAN FAN MOTOR D12E-24PH**A 3N170084 1

SRW086 PL-CPIMS*4*50*3KF 24V00531 2 Torque : 12~14kg•cm

PRT3 GASKET (STG5-5) 24C07991 90mm•••2pcs, 50mm•••2pcs.

Mount the edge saddle and the fan on the partition board.
Cut the gasket and stick it.
90mm ... 2 pcs., 50mm ... 2 pcs.

Install the fan so that its label surface cannot be seen.

PRT3
90mm

PRT1

FAN
PRT3
50mm

PRT2

SRW086
Diagonally in 2 positions
The fan cable should have
been passed through the
edge saddle.

“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”

9-11
 ASSEMBLY DIAGRAM

Assembly Diagram 12 Lamp fan2

Diagram symbol Circuit symbol Part name Part number Q’ty Remarks

FAN FAN MOTOR MBD10-24S-F3 3N170103 1

PRT1 BRACKET (S100) 24H51841 1

SRW075 PL-CPIMS*4*10*3KF 24V00461 4 Torque : 12~14kg•cm

Mount the DC fan on the mounting bracket.

SRW075
4 positions

The mounting base block is

an accessory for the fan.

PRT1

Mount the finger guard that

is attached to the fan.
(Rear surface)

FAN

This screw should be fastened tentatively.

Installations should be arranged so that the fan
can be tightened from the left side as illustrated.

“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”

9-12
 ASSEMBLY DIAGRAM

Assembly Diagram 13 Lamp fan Mt

Diagram symbol Circuit symbol Part name Part number Q’ty Remarks

SRW008 PL-CPIMS*4*10*3KF 24V00461 4 Torque : 12~14kg•cm

SRW003 PL-CPIMS*4*10*3KF 24V00461 3 Torque : 12~14kg•cm

Mount the DC fan and the partition board on the chassis.

SRW003

SRW003
SRW008
4 positions

Adjust the fan outlet port to

the partition board hole.
The fan connector
should have been
passed through the
edge saddle.

Adjust the fan outlet port to the

Mount the finger guard that partition board hole and fix it.
is attached to the fan Tightening torque: 12~ 14kg•cm

“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”

9-13
 ASSEMBLY DIAGRAM

Assembly Diagram 14 Timer

Diagram symbol Circuit symbol Part name Part number Q’ty Remarks

PWB IF-TIMER PWB ASSY 81L23KJ1 1

PRT1 BRACKET (TIMER) S 24H50231 1

SRW095 PL-CPIMS*3*8*3GF 24V00111 1 Torque : 5~7kg•cm

CN XP CN7P (XP) 800W, 1571-26 7NW7W017 1

SRW026 PL-CPIMS*3*8*3GF 24V00111 2 Torque : 5~7kg•cm

Mount the IF-TIMER PWB on the mounting bracket.

SRW095
PRT1

CN
PWB

Mount the TIMER assembly on the SET.

SRW026

“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”

9-14
 ASSEMBLY DIAGRAM

Assembly Diagram 15 Lamp duct1

Diagram symbol Circuit symbol Part name Part number Q’ty Remarks

PRT1 THERMOSTAT CS-7L-75 7N970026 1

PRT2 BRACKET (THERMISTOR) 24H50291 1

SRW089 CBIMS*3*6*3KF 24V00161 2 Torque : 5~7kg•cm

CN LMP CN2P-WP (LM) 170W, 1007-22 7NB2W002 1

PRT3 CLAMPER, WIRE 25283991 1

Install the thermostat on the fitting metal. In this case, the thermostat shall not be mounted slantwise.
Mount the lead clamper and insert the connector in the terminal.
After the insertion of the connector, insert the lead wire in the lead clamper.

PRT2

The thermostat shall

PRT1
overlap the hole edge.
SRW089
2 positions

PRT3

CN

Confirm the insertion of the fasten terminals.

1 There shall be a feeling of being locked when inserted.
2 It shall not come out when being pulled.
3 Push it again after it is pulled.

“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”

9-15
 ASSEMBLY DIAGRAM

Assembly Diagram 16 Lamp duct

Diagram symbol Circuit symbol Part name Part number Q’ty Remarks

PRT4 DUCT (L INHALATION) ASSY 24HS3591 1

PRT5 CLAMPER, WIRE 25283991 1

SRW032 SPL-CPIMS*3*8*3GF 24V00111 2 Torque : 5~7kg•cm

PRT6 GASKET (STG5-5) 24C07991 65mm•••2pcs., 60mm•••2pcs., 40mm•••1pc.,

30mm•••2pcs.

Install the thermostat Assy and the lead clamper in the duct.
Cut a gasket and stick it along the open section.
GASKET (STG5-5)
65mm ••• 2 pcs., 60mm ••• 2 pcs., 40mm ••• 1 pc., 30mm ••• 2 pcs.

PRT5
After installation,
pass the thermostat
connector.

PRT6
30MM
PRT6
40MM

PRT6
PRT6 SRW032 60MM
65MM 2 positions

“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”

9-16
 ASSEMBLY DIAGRAM

Assembly Diagram 17 Lamp duct Mt

Diagram symbol Circuit symbol Part name Part number Q’ty Remarks

SRW066 PL-CPIMS*3*8*3GF 24V00111 4 Torque : 5~7kg•cm

GASKET (STG5-5) 24C07991 40mm•••1pc.

Mount the duct assembly on the SET.

After screw fastening, cut the gasket and stick it along the open area.
Gasket (STG5-5)
40mm ... 1 pc.

Duct assembly

Insert CN (LM) in
POLAMP of the
TIMER PWB.

40MM

SRW066
2 positions

SRW066

“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”

9-17
 ASSEMBLY DIAGRAM

Assembly Diagram 18 Sensor

Diagram symbol Circuit symbol Part name Part number Q’ty Remarks

PWB SENSOR PWB ASSY 82L23KH1 1 Use a yellow discrimination label item.

PRT1 BRACKET (SEN) 24H51831 1

SRW091 SPL-CPIMS*3*8*3GF 24V00111 2 Torque : 5~7kg•cm

SRW023 PL-CPIMS*3*8*3GF 24V00111 2 Torque : 5~7kg•cm

CN POPY CN4P (PY) 1200W, 1571-26 7NW4W039 1

PRT2 CABLE CLIP (FCA-10) 24C02841 3

Mount the connector on the SENSOR PWB and install the

assembly on the mounting bracket.
* Adjust the photo sensor to the fitting hole. Mount the connector on the SENSOR PWB and install the
At that time, confirm that a yellow identification assembly on the mounting bracket.
label is stuck to the side of the [NEC] mark on
the PWB.

SRW023
A yellow identification
label has to be stuck
here. CN

PRT1

PWB

SRW091
2positions

Stick the cable clip to the illustrated position and clamp CN4P (PY).
* The wiring materials shall not be pinched by washers and other parts.

PRT2

“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”

9-18
 ASSEMBLY DIAGRAM

Assembly Diagram 19 Side fan

Diagram symbol Circuit symbol Part name Part number Q’ty Remarks

FAN FAN MOTOR D12E-24PH 10B 3N170080 1

PRT1 CASE (JF120) 24H51691 1

PRT2 GUARD (FAN) 12265641 1

SRW103 PL-CPIMS*4*50*3KF 24V00531 2 Torque : 12~14kg•cm

PRT3 COVER (SIDE R) F 24H50401 1

SRW039 PL-CPIMS*3*8*3GF 24V00111 5 Torque : 5~7kg•cm

SRW041 PL-CPIMS*4*10*3KF 24V00461 4 Torque : 12~14kg•cm

* The fitting metal with a space shall be positioned on the right side.
Mount the FAN/guard on the case. The cable take-out port of the fan shall be positioned upwards.
The fan label shall be positioned visible.

PRT2 Install the fan guards on both

PRT2 sides of the fan.

PRT1

FAN

SRW103
Diagonally in 2 positions

Mount the FAN assembly and the cover on the SET.

The fan guards shall be positioned in a posture
The broader side shall be positioned on the left side. that looks swelling to the outside of the fan.

SRW041
4 positions

SRW039
5 positions

“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”

9-19
 ASSEMBLY DIAGRAM

Assembly Diagram 20 Lamp cover SW

Diagram symbol Circuit symbol Part name Part number Q’ty Remarks

PWB COVER PWB ASSY 82L23KU1 1

PRT1 BRACKET (COV) 24H50211 1

SRW092 PL-CPIMS*3*8*3GF 24V00111 1 Torque : 5~7kg•cm

CN1 KX CN2P (KX) 600W, 1571-26 7NW2W028

SRW024 PL-CPIMS*3*8*3GF 24V00111 2 Torque : 5~7kg•cm

Mount the connector on the COVER PWB and install the assembly on the mounting brackets.

CN1

PRT1

SRW092
PWB SRW024

The connector from the COVER PWB should have been

passed through the edge saddle of the partition board.

Pass the connector

over the fan.
The connector from the
COVER PWB should
have been passed through
the edge saddle.

“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”

9-20
 ASSEMBLY DIAGRAM

Assembly Diagram 21 PS1

Diagram symbol Circuit symbol Part name Part number Q’ty Remarks

DC POWER SUPPLY(MV4500007A) 3N100561 1 Applied to #01~#03.

DC POWER SUPPLY(MV4500007B) 3N100961 1 Applied to #04~.

PRT1 BRACKET(SPS) 24H50051 1

SRW006 PL-CPIMS*4*8*3BF 24V00591 4 Torque : 12~14kg•cm

CN1 PV CN3P(PV) 900W,1015-12 7NW3W050 1

CN2 PSG CN1P(PSG) 100W,1015-14 7NW1N002 1

Mount the mounting bracket on the DC power supply.

PRT1

The mounting bracket can be attached

to any side of the DC power supply.
Mounting should be carried out SRW006
carefully as illustrated at right. 4 positions

DC

Attach the cables to the DC power supply terminals.

The mounting bracket can be attached

to any side of the DC power supply.
Mounting should be carried out CN1 Blue
carefully as illustrated at right.
CN1 Brwon

CN2

SAFETY

“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”

9-21
 ASSEMBLY DIAGRAM

Assembly Diagram 22 PS2

Diagram symbol Circuit symbol Part name Part number Q’ty Remarks

PH CN3P(PH) 780W,1015-14 7NW3W047 1

PG CN4P(PG) 740W,1015-14 7NW4W032 1

PN CN6P(PN) 420W,1007-18 7NW6W025 1

PK CN6P(PK) 450W,1571-26 7NW6W026 1

P1 CN8-10P(P1) 500W,1571-26 7NW8W019 1

LAB LABEL(SET PS) 24L55481 1

BAND (L=100) 24280701 1

Stick the label (Set PS) to the DC power supply.

Connect various connectors according to the stuck label.

LAB

According to the notch

Cut off the surplus portions after bundling the cables with wire harness bands.

70±20mm

“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”

9-22
 ASSEMBLY DIAGRAM

Assembly Diagram 23 PS Mt
Diagram symbol Circuit symbol Part name Part number Q’ty Remarks

SRW078 PL-CPIMS*4*8*3BF 24V00591 4 Torque : 12~14kg•cm

Mount the DC power supply on the chassis base.

At that time, fasten the round terminal of the DC power supply together.

DC power supply assembly

SRW078
4 positions

SAFETY
Fasten the round
terminal together.

“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”

9-23
 ASSEMBLY DIAGRAM

Assembly Diagram 24 SPS

Diagram symbol Circuit symbol Part name Part number Q’ty Remarks

PSU POWER UNIT(ZWS50AF-5/J HFP) 3N100951 1

PRT1 BARRIER(STPS) 24J24621 1

PRT2 BRACKET(STPS) 24H50061 1

SRW087 PL-CPIMS*3*8*3GF 24V00111 4 Torque : 5~7kg•cm

PRT3 EDGE SADDLE 24C04371 2

CN1 PU CN3-5P(PU) 570W,1015-18 7NW3W068 1

CN2 PJ CN4P(PJ) 500W,1007-18 7NW4W033 1

Mount the power unit and barrier on the mounting bracket.

Mount the edge saddle on the mounting bracket.
Mount the connectors on the power unit.

PRT3
2 positions

PRT1

CN1

CN2

PRT2
PSU
SRW087
4 positions

“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”

9-24
 ASSEMBLY DIAGRAM

Assembly Diagram 25 SPS Mt

Diagram symbol Circuit symbol Part name Part number Q’ty Remarks

SRW007 PL-CPIMS*4*8*3BF 24V00591 2 Torque : 12~14kg•cm

Mount the power unit on the chassis base.

At that time, fasten a round terminal together.
The DC power cable should have been passed through the edge saddle.

Power unit

SRW007
SAFETY SRW007
Fasten the round terminal together.

Lay wires of the connectors

for the DC power supply.

“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”

9-25
 ASSEMBLY DIAGRAM

Assembly Diagram 26 Dressing

Diagram symbol Circuit symbol Part name Part number Q’ty Remarks

CN1 PT CN3P (PT) 700W, 1015-12 7NNW3W069 1

The connector from the COVER PWB should have been

passed through the edge saddle of the partition board.
Wires should have been laid for the connectors (PU, PV)
from the power unit and the DC power supply.
Make wiring for the connectors (PT).
Make wiring so that each connector of
PU/PV can be passed through the hollow
part of the partition board.

Use the PT connectors ]

on the side where no
earth wires are present.
Their length shall be
aligned to that of PU/PV. Each connector
is passed above
the fan.
The connector from the
COVER PWB should
have been passed through
the edge saddle.

“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”

9-26
 ASSEMBLY DIAGRAM

Assembly Diagram 27 Lamp connector1

Diagram symbol Circuit symbol Part name Part number Q’ty Remarks

PRT1 BRACKET (CONNECTOR) 24H50141 1

PRT2 PLATE (CONNECTOR) 24J24372 1

PRT3 CONNECTOR (Lamp2KW) 24BS6792 2

SRW016 PL-CPIMS*4*10*3KF 24V00461 5 Torque : 12~14kg•cm

SRW081 PL-CPIMS*3*20*3GF 24V00311 4 Torque : 5~7kg•cm

SRW082 FLANGED NUT (M3) 24N08171 4

CN1 LAMP CABLE (L=340) M6-M6 7N530028 1

CN2 CN WIRE 250W, 1283-6 7NN1N029 1

SRW111 PL-CPIMS*6*14*3KF 24N02981 2 Torque : 16~18kg•cm

Assemble the lamp connector block.

SRW016 PRT2
5 positions PRT1

PRT3
Lamp connector 2 positions
accessory

SRW082
SRW081
In 2 positions each
Mount the lamp from reverse side
connector together
with the accessory
in 2 positions each.

The connector mounting plane shall face

Install the M6 side of the connector. the outside. (Otherwise, screw fastening
After mounting, put the cover to the root level. becomes impossible.)

SRW111

CN1
CN2

“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”

9-27
 ASSEMBLY DIAGRAM

Assembly Diagram 28 Lamp connector2

Diagram symbol Circuit symbol Part name Part number Q’ty Remarks

SRW017 PL-CPIMS*4*10*3KF 24V00461 3 Torque : 12~14kg•cm

PRT1 BRACKET (LPS) ASSY 24HS3731 1

PRT2 WIRE SADDLE (C) 16287421 1

Mount the lamp connector ASSY on the mounting bracket.

When the lamp cable is being passed through the mounting bracket, be careful not to hurt it.

SRW017

Do not damage the cable

when it is passed through
the hole.

Install an edge saddle on the fitting metal.

PRT2

PRT1

“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”

9-28
 ASSEMBLY DIAGRAM

Assembly Diagram 29 Lamp PS Mt

Diagram symbol Circuit symbol Part name Part number Q’ty Remarks

SRW065 PL-CPIMS*4*10*3KF 24V00461 5 Torque : 12~14kg•cm

SRW003 PL-CPIMS*4*10*3KF 24V00461 2 Torque : 12~14kg•cm

SRW004 PL-CPIMS*3*8*3GF 24V00111 2 Torque : 5~7kg•cm

Mount the mounting bracket ASSY on the SET.

SRW065
5 positions

SRW104

SRW003

“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”

9-29
 ASSEMBLY DIAGRAM

Assembly Diagram 30 L Haiki1

Diagram symbol Circuit symbol Part name Part number Q’ty Remarks

PRT1 DUCT (L EXHAUST) ASSY 24HS3711 1

PRT2 SHEET (HD1) 24J25792 1

PRT3 SHEET (HD2) 24J25802 1

PRT4 NET D 24H53091 1

PRT5 NET E 24H53101 1

Stick a sheet to inside.

Install a net on inside.

PRT1 PRT1

PRT2 PRT3

Install Net D inside and fit Net E. Mount the assembly on the duct.

PRT1

PRT4

PRT5

“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”

9-30
 ASSEMBLY DIAGRAM

Assembly Diagram 31 L Haiki2

Diagram symbol Circuit symbol Part name Part number Q’ty Remarks

PRT1 BRACKET (L EXHAUST) 24H51481 1

PRT2 COLLAR (CX-403) 24C07631 2

SRW102 PL-CPIMS*3*12*3KF 24V00121 2 Torque : 5~7kg•cm

PRT3 GASKET (STG6-10) 24C07261 1 60mm•••2pcs.

PRT4 SHEET (HD5) 24J25833 1

PRT5 SHEET (HD7) 24J25852 1

PRT6 SHEET (HD8) 24J25982 1

Stick a sheet to inside.

PRT4

PRT6

PRT5

Mount the collar and fitting metal on the duct.

Cut a gasket and stick it.

STG6-10 60mm•••2pcs.

SRW102

The narrower
section between
hole and edge
shall be positioned PRT1
toward you.

PRT2

PRT3
60mm

“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”

9-31
 ASSEMBLY DIAGRAM

Assembly Diagram 32 L Haiki3

Diagram symbol Circuit symbol Part name Part number Q’ty Remarks

PRT1 FILTER PLATE A 24H52721 1

PRT2 FILTER PLATE B 24H52731 1

PRT3 NET C 24H52761 1

SRW101 PL-CPIMS*3*8*3GF 24V00111 4 Torque : 5~7kg•cm

Install the Filter Plates A/B and Net C.

PRT1
The hook part on
PRT2
PRT2 this side shall be
pushed in first.
The hook part on
this side shall be
pushed in first.

PRT3 2

PRT3
Pinch it between
the filter blades
1 A/B.

PRT1

Install the NET C and the duct.

Tighten the duct and

the filter plate together.

SRW101

Insert the hook part

of the filter plate in
the hole and hang it.

“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”

9-32
 ASSEMBLY DIAGRAM

Assembly Diagram 33 Lamp PS1

Diagram symbol Circuit symbol Part name Part number Q’ty Remarks

IGN IGNITER (SS-50GMSR) 3N100931 1

PRT1 BRACKET (IG) 24H51871 1

CN1 IG1 CN WIRE (IG1) 300W, 1015-18 7NN1W006 1

CN2 IG2 CN WIRE (IG2) 200W, 1015-18 7NN1W006 1

CN3 KV CN3P (KV) 270-180W, 1015-20 7NM3N001 1

PWB C PWB ASSY 82L23KC1 1

SRW079 PL-CPIMS*5*12*3CF 24V00611 2 Torque : 16~18kg•cm

SRW107 PL-CPIMS*3*8*3GF 24V00111 2 Torque : 5~7kg•cm

Remove the nuts from rear side of the igniter and mount the mounting bracket.
Mount CN2 on the + terminal of the igniter and CN1 on the – terminal. (+: white wire, -: black wire)

Igniter mounting nut

Tightening torque: 12 ~ 14kg•cm
CN1
– : CN1

PRT1

CN2
+ : CN2

IGN

Confirm the correct insertion of Faston terminals.

1 There shall be a locking reaction at the time of
insertion.
2 It shall not be drawn out when pulled.
SAFETY 3 Try to pull and push it in again.

Install the igniter/C PWB in the set.

The lamp cable (HV) shall be mounted after removing the +HV-side nut of the igniter block.
Mount the connector on the C PWB.

Lamp cable (HV) SAFETY

Tighten it with the removed nut.
Tightening torque: 16 ~ 18kg•cm

SRW079
IGN
2 positions

CN3
Mount it on the C PWB.

PWB
The connector
shall be located
on ballast power
side.
SRW107
2 positions

“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”

9-33
 ASSEMBLY DIAGRAM

Assembly Diagram 34 Lamp PS2

Diagram symbol Circuit symbol Part name Part number Q’ty Remarks

BPS POWER SUPPLY (KSX-1250NEVT) 3N100941 1

CN1 PL CN12P (PL) 500W, 1061-26 7NWBW010 1

CN2 FAN CN3P (FAN) 400W, 1007-24 7NW3B001 2

Attach the connector to the ballast power supply and temporarily put the assembly on the set.

BPS

CN1

Attach the connectors to the fan cables.

Clamp cables with a cable clamper.
Remove the + terminal nut from the igniter and mount a round terminal.

Make CN1/CN2 wiring to

the edge saddle. Lamp cable (HV)
The CN2 connector block
shall be positioned nearer
to the ballast side than to CN2
the edge saddle. Mount the fan connector.

Make wiring so that the cable of the

CN(KV)+
Cable from the igniter
Cable from the ballast power supply
Tighten it with the removed nut.
Tightening torque: 16 ~ 18kg•cm
SAFETY
ballast power supply and that of the
lamp are separated substantially from
each other.
For better workmanship, the cable
from the ballast power supply should
be pushed in between the igniter and
the fan.

“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”

9-34
 ASSEMBLY DIAGRAM

Assembly Diagram 35 Lamp PS Connector

Diagram symbol Circuit symbol Part name Part number Q’ty Remarks

C PWB CONNECTOR

SRW112 PL-CPIMS*5*12*3GF 24V00611 1 Torque : 16~18kg•cm

SRW083 PL-CPIMS*5*12*3GF 24V00611 5 Torque : 16~18kg•cm

Connect the cable to the terminal that is located on the side surface of the ballast power supply.

SRW112
Ballast power supply SAFETY Caution for tightening torque

Igniter – side

CN(KV) CN(KV) – side

– side Lamp cable

PT Connector

Lamp cable
Igniter
– : CN1

Fix the ballast power supply to the set.

SRW083
5 positions

“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”

9-35
 ASSEMBLY DIAGRAM

Assembly Diagram 36 ACSW

Diagram symbol Circuit symbol Part name Part number Q’ty Remarks

PRT1 CP52B-F020 6N500015 1

PRT2 BRACKET (SW) 24H50161 1

SRW094 PL-CPIMS*3*6*3KF 24V00571 4 Torque : 5~7kg•cm

CN1 PW CN3P(PW) 200W, 1015-12 7NW3W067 1

CN2 AC CN2P (AC) 130W, 1015-12 7NN2N002 1

Mount the circuit protector on the mounting bracket.

Remove a nut from the circuit protector and mount the connector.
PRT1

PRT2

SRW094
4 positions

SAFETY
Connect the brown
Connect the blue
wire.
wire.

CN2

Each connector shall

ot touch any terminal.

Remove the nut that is attached to the

circuit protector. Then, tighten it. CN1
4 positions
Tightening torque: 12 ~ 14kg•cm

“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”

9-36
 ASSEMBLY DIAGRAM

Assembly Diagram 37 AC inlet

Diagram symbol Circuit symbol Part name Part number Q’ty Remarks

PRT1 INLET 1621-X-9990-A-1 7N120003 1

PRT2 BRACKET (PC CABLE) 24P04242 1

SRW076 CFIMS*3*6*3KF 24V00421 2 Torque : 5~7kg•cm

CN1 AC CN2P (AC) 140W, 1015-12 7NN2W006 1

CN2 ACG CN WIRE (G) 140W, 1015-12 7NN1W008 1

PRT3 EARTH TERMINALS-Q0204 7N120006 1

CN3 CN WIRE 150W, 1015-18 7NN1N035 1

SRW100 SCREW, PL-CPIMS*4*10*3KF 910E4026 1 Torque : 8~10kg•cm

Mount the inlet on the mounting bracket.

PRT2

PRT1
SRW076
2 positions

Remove nuts from the earth terminal and mount the

terminal on the mounting bracket.
Insert the connector in the inlet.
At that time, insertion shall be free from terminal clearing.
Nut Torque : 5~7kg•cm
Nut Torque : 6~8kg•cm
Spring washer
Round terminal The CN3 connector
shall be pulled out not
upwards, but sidewise.
Mounting bracket
CN3
Terminal
SAFETY

CN2
CN1 Brown

CN1 Blue

“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”

9-37
 ASSEMBLY DIAGRAM

Assembly Diagram 38 AC unit1

Diagram symbol Circuit symbol Part name Part number Q’ty Remarks

PRT1 NOISE FILTERS MXB1220-33 HP 6N120099 1

CN G CN WIRE (G) 100W, 1015-18 7NN1N028 1

Mount the connectors of the circuit protector Assy block on the noise filter.
Remove the cover and screws from the noise filter block and fasten the AC connector / round terminals with screws.
(Tightening torque: 12 ~ 14kg•cm)
After the completion of screw fastening, mount the cover from which the screw block has been removed.

SAFETY

After the completion of

screw fastening, mount
the removed cover.

Brown wire of the AC connector

PRT1

CN
Blue wire of the AC connector

Tighten it with the removed screws.

Tightening torque: 12 ~ 14kg•cm

Mount the connectors of the AC inlet Assy block on the noise filter.
Remove the cover and screws from the noise filter and fasten the connectors from the inlet by means of screws.
After the completion of screw fastening, mount the removed cover from which the screw block has been removed.
After the completion of
screw fastening, mount
the removed cover.

CN (AC) in brown
SAFETY

PRT1
CN(G)

CN (AC) in blue

Tighten it with the removed screws.

Tightening torque: 12 ~ 14kg•cm

“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”

9-38
 ASSEMBLY DIAGRAM

Assembly Diagram 39 AC unit2

Diagram symbol Circuit symbol Part name Part number Q’ty Remarks

PWB AC PWB ASSY 81L23HC1 1

PRT2 BRACKET (AC PWB) 24H50151 1

SRW084 PL-CPIMS*3*8*3GF 24V00111 4 Torque : 5~7kg•cm

SRW085 PL-CPIMS*4*10*3KF 24V00461 2 Torque : 12~14kg•cm

SRW019 PL-CPIMS*3*8*3GF 24V00111 4 Torque : 5~7kg•cm

SRW100 PL-CPIMS*3*10*3KF 24V00461 1 Torque : 12~14kg•cm

Mount the AC PWB and the noise filter on the mounting bracket.
Mount the round terminal from the earth terminal.
SRW084
4 positions

PWB

SRW100 PRT2
SAFETY 1 position
NOISE FILTER

SRW085
2 positions

Mount the connector of the circuit protector assembly block on the noise filter and install the assembly on the mounting bracket.

SRW019
4 positions

CN(PW)
Circuit protector assembly

Either side of CN
should have been
protruded from this
section.

“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”

9-39
 ASSEMBLY DIAGRAM

Assembly Diagram 40 AC unit Mt

Diagram symbol Circuit symbol Part name Part number Q’ty Remarks

SRW018 PL-CPIMS*4*10*3KF 24V00461 2 Torque : 12~14kg•cm

Install the AC unit in the set and mount the connector on the AC PWB.

The PV/PU connector is

led through this hole.
Insert the PT/PV, PU
connectors.

SRW018

“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”

9-40
 ASSEMBLY DIAGRAM

Assembly Diagram 41 AC inlet Mt

Diagram symbol Circuit symbol Part name Part number Q’ty Remarks

PRT1 BRACKET (PSC) 24H50181 1

SRW021 PL-CPIMS*3*8*3GF 24V00111 2 Torque : 5~7kg•cm

PRT2 HOLDING BRACKET (PS) 24H51891 1

SRW080 P-CPIMS*4*20*3KF 24V00564 4 Torque : 12~14kg•cm

PRT3 WIRE (PS) 24H38091 1

Mount the holding bracket on the bracket block and install the inlet assembly block.
At that time, mount the holding brackets together in the lower two positions.

SRW080
2 positions

SRW021

PRT1

Mount the wire in the holding bracket hole.

PRT2

PRT3
SRW080
2 pcs.

“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”

9-41
 ASSEMBLY DIAGRAM

Assembly Diagram 42 Shield PS

Diagram symbol Circuit symbol Part name Part number Q’ty Remarks

PRT1 PARTITION PLATE (PS) 24H52351 1

SRW065 SCREW, PL-CPIMS*4*10*3KF 910E4026 1 Torque : 8~10kg•cm

SRW088 SCREW, PL-CPIMS*4*10*3KF 910E4026 1 Torque : 8~10kg•cm

Install the partition board.

Mount the round terminal of the PT connector on the SET.

SAFETY

SRW088

SRW065

Round terminal of the

PT connector

PRT1

“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”

9-42
 ASSEMBLY DIAGRAM

Assembly Diagram 43 Rear cover ue

Diagram symbol Circuit symbol Part name Part number Q’ty Remarks

PRT1 REINFORCE BRACKET R ASSY 24HS3771 1

PRT2 FOOT BASE 24H51703 2

SRW130 CFIMS*3*6*3KF 24V00421 4 Torque : 5~7kg•cm

SRW055 PL-CPIMS*4*10*3KF 24V00461 2 Torque : 12~14kg•cm

SRW018 PL-CPIMS*4*10*3KF 24N00461 2 Torque : 12~14kg•cm

Mount the foot base on the reinforcement bracket.

Longer side
Longer side
Wide
Put the foot base as illustrated.
Wide Put the reinforcement bracket
in the direction as illustrated.
(A wider side should face
outside of the set.)

PRT2 PRT2
SRW130 SRW130
2 positions 2 poitions

PRT1

Mount the reinforcement bracket on the SET.

Fix the AC unit block.

SRW055 SRW018

SRW055

Tighten the round terminal

together, which is extended
from the noise filter.

SAFETY

“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”

9-43
 ASSEMBLY DIAGRAM

Assembly Diagram 44 Shield LR

Diagram symbol Circuit symbol Part name Part number Q’ty Remarks

PRT1 SHIELDING PLATE (LR) 24H51881 1

SRW011 PL-CPIM*3*8*3GF 24V00111 3 Torque : 5~7kg•cm

Mount the shielding plate on the SET.

SRW011

PRT1

“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”

9-44
 ASSEMBLY DIAGRAM

Assembly Diagram 45 Shield

Diagram symbol Circuit symbol Part name Part number Q’ty Remarks

PRT1 COVER BOARD (LAMP) 24H50351 1

PRT2 EDGE SADDLE 25281281 1

SRW035 PL-CPIMS*3*8*3GF 24V00111 4 Torque : 5~7kg•cm

PWB FAN PWB ASSY 82L23KD1 1

PRT3 BRACKET (F-PWB) 24H51662 1

SRW093 PL-CPIMS*3*8*3GF 24V00111 5 Torque : 5~7kg•cm

SRW128 PL-CPIMS*3*8*3GF 24V00111 2 Torque : 5~7kg•cm

SRW070 SPECIAL SCREW (M4*14) 24N07492 2 Torque : 12~14kg•cm

Mount the edge saddle on the shield plate.

Mount the FAN PWB on the fitting metal.
Attach a specific screw.

SRW093
5 positions PWB

PRT2

PRT1
SRW070

PRT3

Mount the shield plate on the set.

At that time, the connector from the IF-TIMER PWB shall have been passed through the edge saddle.
Install the fitting metal (F-PWB) Assy in the set.

SRW128
2 positions

Torque : 12~14kg•cm

SRW035
The connector from 4 positions
the IF-TIMER shall
have been passed.

“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”

9-45
 ASSEMBLY DIAGRAM

Assembly Diagram 46 Dressing2

Diagram symbol Circuit symbol Part name Part number Q’ty Remarks

PRT1 BAND (L=100) 24280701 2

Cut off the surplus portions after bundling the cables with wire harness bands.

After insertion of the fan connector, bundle the cables with wire harness bands and
then cut off the surplus portions.

“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”

9-46
 ASSEMBLY DIAGRAM

Assembly Diagram 47 MOTOR PWB

Diagram symbol Circuit symbol Part name Part number Q’ty Remarks

PWB MOTOR PWB ASSY 81L19D03 1

PRT1 BRACKET (MOTOR) 24H51821 1

PRT2 BARRIER (MOTOR) 24J24631 1

SRW077 PL-CPIMS*3*8*3KF 24V00571 4 Torque : 5~7kg•cm

SRW022 PL-CPIMS*4*10*3KF 24V00461 2 Torque : 12~14kg•cm

POPD CN6P (PD) 230W, 1571-26 6NW6W024 1

PODM CN13P (DM) 350W, 1571-26 7NWCW007 1

Mount the MOTOR PWB and the barrier on the mounting bracket.
Mount the connector on the PD/DM.

SRW077
4 positions

POPD
PRT1

PWB

PRT2

PODM

Mount the MOTOR PWB ASSY on the engine side. Insert the connectors (DA/DB/DC/DD) that are extended from the engine.
Mount the DM connector from the CPU PWB on POSM of the CPU PWB.

SRW022

PODM

PODA

PODB

PODC

SRW022
PODD

“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”

9-47
 ASSEMBLY DIAGRAM

Assembly Diagram 48 Prism bracket1

Diagram symbol Circuit symbol Part name Part number Q’ty Remarks

PR1 PRISM ASSEMBLY 82L23132 1

PRT1 EF1F103A2-40065 (THERMISTOR) 3N810007 3

PRT2 HEAT SINK (M5120) 24H52291 4

PRT3 BRACKET (HS BASE) 24H52301 1

PRT4 PLATE (TAP) 24H52311 1

SRW074 PL-CPIMS*3*8*3GF 24V00111 3 Torque : 5~7kg•cm

SRW071 PL-CPIMS*4*10*3GF 24V00461 3 Torque : 12~14kg•cm

SRW073 PL-CPIMS*3*12*3KF 24V00121 2 Torque : 5~7kg•cm

After installation of the thermostat on the heat sink, mount it on each RGB DMD block of the Prism Assembly.

PRI
PRT2
RGB 1 place for each

SRW074
RGB 1 place for each

PRT1
RGB 1 place for each SRW071
RGB 2 place for each

Install the plate on top of the prism.

SRW073
PRT4

Install the heat sink on the bracket (HS base).

PRT3 SRW071

PRT2

“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”

9-48
 ASSEMBLY DIAGRAM

Assembly Diagram 49 Prism bracket2

Diagram symbol Circuit symbol Part name Part number Q’ty Remarks

PRT1 COLLAR (CX-302B) 24J25071 2

SRW072 PL-CPIMS*3*8*3GF 24V00111 3 Torque : 5~7kg•cm

CN1 CN7P 200W, 1007-22 7NB7B008 3

Bracket 1 Bracket was affixation of the engine

Pinch the collar with the bracket Assy and mount it on the plate.

SRW072

PRT1

Install the extension metal that is furnished to the engine, using the prism screws.

Mount it in this position with screws.

After installation, apply a screw lock agent.
Tightening torque: 16 ~ 18kg•cm

Insert CN7P in each R,G,B PWB.

CN1

“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”

9-49
 ASSEMBLY DIAGRAM

Assembly Diagram 50 FFC

Diagram symbol Circuit symbol Part name Part number Q’ty Remarks

CABLE, FFC 50P*350 P0.5 SO 7N500022 6

CONDUCTIVE CLOTH TAPE E05 9R030011 6 L=2400mm

ACETATE CLOTCH TAPE 570F 9R030010 6 L=110mm

Plane B pattern

Plane A pattern Terminal plane

PRT3 PRT2
Installed on FMT side Installed on FIB side Note 1) The conductive cloth tape and the acetate cloth tape
shall be stuck to Pattern A side of FPC.
PRT1
Note 2) The conductive cloth tape (240mm) shall be stuck,
separated by more than 5mm from the FPC terminal block.
(Specified for 10mm)
10mm Note 3) The conductive cloth tape (60mm) shall be stuck,providing a
10mm
one turn loop at 10mm from the FPC terminal block.
PRT2(240mm) Note 4) After adhesion, the acetate cloth tape shall be pressed to
Combination of connected circuits avoid peeling off.
(Listed on the plane with no descriptions)
J6 – –– J2B
J7 – –– J2G 10mm from the terminal block
J8 – –– J2R
J9 – –– J1B PRT1
J10 – –– J1G
J11 – –– J1R

Mount the FFC cable according to each connector of the FMT PWB attached to the prism.
* The side, where the conductive cloth tape is stuck close to the terminal block, shall be mounted on the FIB board.
The board printing for the R and G connectors is provided with [J1R/J2R].
Therefore, be careful not to confuse connections.

Mount the J3 ~ J5 connectors on the respective connectors of the FMT PWB.

“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”

9-50
 ASSEMBLY DIAGRAM

Assembly Diagram 51 Prism Mt

Diagram symbol Circuit symbol Part name Part number Q’ty Remarks

GLUE, SCREW LOCK 92201082

Apply a screw lock agent to three screw holes on engine side.

Mount it on the engine Assy with the screw that is attached with the prism.
Tightening torque: 16 ~ 18kg•cm
The prism should be pressed and tightened clockwise, in the order of 1 to 2 to 3 as seen from above.
After installation, apply a screw lock agent to the screw head and the engine side.

3 2

Prism

ENG

“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”

9-51
 ASSEMBLY DIAGRAM

Assembly Diagram 52 CPU Unit1

Diagram symbol Circuit symbol Part name Part number Q’ty Remarks

PWB MOTHER PWB ASSY 81L23M02 1

PRT1 SHIELD CASE (TI) A ASSY 24HS4151 1

PRT2 EDGE SADDLE 24C04371 1

PRT3 GASKET (USB) 24J23621 1

PRT4 PLATE (BNC) 24H46901 1

PRT5 DECOR PLATE (INPUT) B 24K26301 1

SRW059 PL-CPIMS*3*8*3GF 24V00111 13 Torque : 5~7kg•cm

Mount the edge saddle on the shield case and stick the gasket to it.
Remove two each of hexagon head screws from PO6003 and PO6007 of the Mother PWB and also remove one
each screw from PO6001 and PO6001.
The removed screws will be used again. Be careful not to lose them.
Mount the fitting plate on the PO6001/PO6002 blocks of the Mother PWB, and then mount it on the fitting metal.

PRT1
PWB

PRT2
PRT3

PRT4

Reverse the fitting metal and mount the previously removed hexagon head screws on the PO6003/PO6007 blocks and the
PO6001/PO6002 blocks.
Stick the decoration plate.
PRT5
Stick it according to the hole
position of the DVI terminal.

Tighten the removed hexagon

Tighten the removed hexagon
head screws.
head screws.
Tightening torque: 5 ~ 7kg•cm
Parts shall be mounted in the
order of claw washers, washers,
Reverse the fitting metal and tighten the PWB with screws. and hexagon nuts.
Tightening torque: 7 ~ 9kg•cm

SRW059

PRT5

“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”

9-52
 ASSEMBLY DIAGRAM

Assembly Diagram 53 CPU Unit (2)

Diagram symbol Circuit symbol Part name Part number Q’ty Remarks

GPIO PWB ASSY 81L23ZE1 1

ETHER PWB ASSY 81L23ZB1
PRT1 BRACKET (GP) 24H57761 1

SRW031 PL-CPIMS*3*8*3GF 24V00111 4 Torque : 5~7kg•cm

PRT3 SHIELD CASE (TI) B 24H51901 1
PRT2 GUIDE RAIL (GR-180S) 24C02751 6
PRT5 SHIELD CASE (TI) d 24H51922 1
SRW031 PL-CPIMS*3*8*3GF 24V00111 6 Torque : 5~7kg•cm
SRW047 PL-CPIMS*3*8*3GF 24V00111 4 Torque : 5~7kg•cm
SRW072 PL-CPIMS*3*8*3GF 24V00111 2 Torque : 5~7kg•cm
PRT6 CABLE LAN 0.33M PCRJE0033 7N520058 1
PRT7 CABLE LAN 0.60M PCRJE0060 7N520063 2
CN1 CN37-40P (GP) 390W, 1571-28 7NWLW044 1
CN2 CN14P (CO) 470W, 1061-28 7NWDW016 1
CN3 CN2P (LAN) 650W, 1061-24 7NW2W032 1

Stick gaskets according to Switching Hubs 4 and 5. Fasten three LAN cables and
Combine the switching hub and the fitting metal, and mount the assembly on the fitting metal. the GP and CO cables.

PRT1 (CN2) Inserted in POCO.

SRW048 X2

PRT7

SRW037 X4
(CN1) Inserted in PO6005.
The side with a locking effect shall
be inserted.
SRW047 X4 M8501 Two LAN cables of 600mm long shall be passed through this hole.

M8507 Insert PRT6 M8501 shall be inserted in M7400 of the CPU PWB.

M8508
CN3

(CN3) Inserted in POLAN.

(PRT7) Insert M8508 in the LAN terminal of the Mother PWB.

Insert M8507 in 7500 of the CPU PWB.

Mount the guide rails on the shield case. Make up a shield case Assy
and fasten it with screws.

PRT5
SRW031
3 positions on
PRT3 one side
3 positions on
the opposite side

PRT4
PRT3

“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”

9-53
 ASSEMBLY DIAGRAM

Assembly Diagram 54 CPU Unit2

Diagram symbol Circuit symbol Part name Part number Q’ty Remarks

FAN1 FAN MOTOR D06R-24TH 34B 3N170052 1

PRT1 FINGER GURD 24C04131 1

SRW115 PL-CPIMS*3*25*3GF 24V00301 2 Torque : 5~7kg•cm

PRT2 BRACKET (F80) 24H58021 1

SRW042 PL-CPIMS*3*8*3GF 24V00111 4 Torque : 5~7kg•cm

FAN2 DCFAN 3112KL 3N170097 1

SRW060 SCREW, PL-CPIMS*3*40*3GF 24V00731 2 Torque : 5~7kg•cm

PRT3 GASKET (STG10-10) 24C05351 260mm•••1pc.

PRT4 GUARD (FAN) (80) 24C08421 1

Mount the fan/finger guard on the shield case Assy. Mount the fan on the fitting metal.

SRW060
FAN1 PRT4 Diagonal fastening
Mount the connectors
in a fashion so that they
are pulled upwards.

SRW115
Diagonal fastening PRT2
PRT1

FAN2
Draw out the connectors in the
illustrated direction.

Mount the metal fittings that are attached with the fan. Cut a gasket and stick it to the shield case (TI) B. 260mm •••1 pc.

SRW042
4 positions

PRT3

“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”

9-54
 ASSEMBLY DIAGRAM

Assembly Diagram 55 CPU Unit3

Diagram symbol Circuit symbol Part name Part number Q’ty Remarks

SRW020 PL-CPIMS*3*8*3GF 24V00111 4 Torque : 5~7kg•cm

CN1 CN9P(CT)400W, 1061-26 7NW9W006 1

PRT2 STUD(D-SUB H*5.3) 24N08192 12 Torque : 5~7kg•cm

PRT3 COVER(TML) 24P04931 1

SRW040 PL-CPIMS*3*8*3GF 24V00111 2 Torque : 5~7kg•cm

PRT4 EDGE SADDLE 24C04371 1

Assemble the shield case and the mounting bracket, and fasten them with screws.

SRW020

Insert the LAN cable (600mm) of the ETHER PWB

PRT2 X4 (M8508) in the LAN terminal of the M-SLOT PWB.
PRT2 X2 2 pcs. each
PRT2 X4
2 pcs. each on both sides on both sides

Mount the accessory

stud on the connector.
CN1
2 pcs. each

1 Using the studs, fix the D-SUB 9P and 37P

of the Slot Mother PWB. (2 pcs. each)
2 Mount CN37-40P (GP) and CN9P (CT) on
the D-SUB terminal and fix them with studs.
(2 pcs. each)
PRT1

PRT4
PRT2 X2

PRT3
SRW040

“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”

9-55
 ASSEMBLY DIAGRAM

Assembly Diagram 56 CPU Unit4

Diagram symbol Circuit symbol Part name Part number Q’ty Remarks

CN2 CN9P(N8) 200W, 1007-22 7NB9B003 1

CN3 CN4-5P (PF1) 280W, 1571-26 7NW4W034 1
CN4 CN10P (N10) 280W, 1007-18 7NW0W015 1
CN5 CN10P (N11) 280W, 1007-18 7NW0W016 1

PRT1 BRACKET (MAIN) 24H57751 1

SRW057 PL-CPIMS*3*8*3GF 24V00111 4 Torque : 5~7kg•cm

PWB1 CPU PWB ASSY 81L23CA1 1

PWB2 SCAP PWB ASSY 81L23CC1 1

SRW046 PL-CPIMS*3*8*3GF 24V00111 1 Torque : 5~7kg•cm

SRW056 PL-CPIMS*3*8*3GF 24V00111 6 Torque : 5~7kg•cm

Insert the connectors (N8) (CO) (5-pin side of PF1) (N10) (N11).

CN2 CN3 CN4 CN5

Mount the shield case (MAIN) A on the shield case unit.

Pull out in advance the tips of the connectors (N8) (CO) (PF1).

SRW057

PRT1 SRW046

PWB2

Remove the hexagon head screw from M3201 of the CPU PWB and tighten it together with the shield case.
Then, install the CPU PWB.

SRW056

PWB1

Tighten the removed hexagon nut.

Tightening torque: 5 ~ 7kg•cm

“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”

9-56
 ASSEMBLY DIAGRAM

Assembly Diagram 57 CPU Unit5

Diagram symbol Circuit symbol Part name Part number Q’ty Remarks

CN1 CN14P (CL1) 120W, 1571-26 7NWDW012 1

CN2 CN12P (CK1) 150W, 1571-26 7NWBW011 1
CN3 CN13-7P (PM) 300W, 1061-26 7NWCW008 1
CN4 CN40P (IF) 600W, 1571-28 7NWLW040 1
CN5 CN7P (CP1) 250W, 1007-24 7NW7W023 1
CN6 CN13P (DM), 350W, 1571-26 7NWCW007 1
CN7 CN3P (CB) 100W, 1061-26 7NW3W066 1 * Insert it in POCB2 of CPU (POCB1) ⇔
SCAP PWB.

PRT2 SHIELD CASE (MAIN) B 24H51941 4

SRW058 PL-CPIMS*3*8*3GF 24V00111 4 Torque : 5~7kg•cm

PWB1 INTERFACE (2506940-0100) 7N950871 1 Applicable to #1 ~ #10

PWB1 INTERFACE (2506940-0001) 7N950851 1 Applicable to #11 ~
PWB2 PROCESSOR 2506937-0002 7N950861 1
PWB3 EFIB PWB ASSY 81L23E02 1

Insert the CO connector of the GPIO PWB in the CPU PWB (CO).
Insert the CT connector of the Mother PWB in the CPU PWB (CT).
Insert the connectors in CPU.

CN5 CN4 CN2 CN1

CN3
CN7 CN6

CO

CT
Insert the LAN cables of the Ether
PWB (M8501) in M7400.

Insert the LAN cables of the Ether

PWB (M8507) in M7500.

Install the PROCESSOR BOARD, INTERFACE BOARD, and FIB BOARD on the shield case unit.
The PROCESSOR BOARD and the INTERFACE BOARD shall be inserted firmly.
The FIB BOARDneed not be inserted firmly because the connector of the FMT PWB has to be connected to it later.
Mount various connectors on the unit.

PWB1

PWB2

PWB3

“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”

9-57
 ASSEMBLY DIAGRAM

Assembly Diagram 58 Cover SW

Diagram symbol Circuit symbol Part name Part number Q’ty Remarks

PRT1 COVER (TISW CABLE) 24H58031 1

PRT2 COVER SW ASSY 82L77691 1

SRW114 CBIMS*2*6*3GF 24V00191 1 Torque : 1.8~2.0kg•cm

SRW108 PL-CPIMS*3*8*3GF 24V00111 2 Torque : w•cm

Fix the Cover SW Assy to the cover (TISW CABLE).

PRT2

SRW114

PRT1

Fasten the fixed assembly to the shield case.

SRW114

Install the cover (TISW cable) on

which the Detector SW SASSY
has been mounted.

Insert the 2P connector of the

Detector SW SASSY in PO6013
of the Mother PWB.

“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”

9-58
 ASSEMBLY DIAGRAM

Assembly Diagram 59 CPU Unit Mt

Diagram symbol Circuit symbol Part name Part number Q’ty Remarks

SRW027 PL-CPIMS*4*10*3KF 24V00461 5 Torque : 12~14kg•cm

Mount the shield case unit on the set.

SRW027 SRW027
3 positions 2 positions

“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”

9-59
 ASSEMBLY DIAGRAM

Assembly Diagram 60 FRONT BAR UE

Diagram symbol Circuit symbol Part name Part number Q’ty Remarks

PRT1 REINFORCEMENT BRACKET F 24H51811 1

PRT2 FOOT BASE 24H51703 2

SRW130 CFIMS*3*6*3KF 24V00421 4 Torque : 5~7kg•cm

SRW004 PL-CPIMS*4*10*3KF 24V00461 2 Torque : 12~14kg•cm

Mount the foot base on the reinforcement bracket.

Longer side
Longer side

Wide Put the foot base as illustrated. Put the

reinforcement bracket in the direction as Wide
illustrated below. (The wider side shall
face outside of the SET.)
SRW130
2 positions
SRW130
2 positions

PRT1

PRT2
PRT2

Mount the reinforcement bracket on the SET.

SRW004 SRW004

“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”

9-60
 ASSEMBLY DIAGRAM

Assembly Diagram 61 DIV PWB

Diagram symbol Circuit symbol Part name Part number Q’ty Remarks

PWB DIV PWB ASSY 81L23HB1 1

PRT1 BRACKET (DIV) 24H51861 1

SRW138 PL-CPIMS*3*8*3GF 24V00111 8 Torque : 5~7kg•cm

SRW010 PL-CPIMS*4*10*3KF 24V00461 2 Torque : 12~14kg•cm

CN1 KM CN11P (KM) 350W, 1061-26 7NWAW002 1

PRT2 WIRE SADDLE C 16287421 1

CN2 CN3P (FAN) 160W, 1061-24 7NW3W077 1

CN3 CN15P 30S, 1061-24 7NWE0001 1

Mount the DVI PWB and the wire saddle on the mounting bracket.
CN1

SRW138
8 positions

PRT1
CN3
PWB

PRT2

Mount the assembly on the SET.

The connector (IF) shall have been pulled out toward the control side.
Insert the connector. (See the next page in regard to the position for connector insertion.)

SRW010
2 positions

CN2

IF

“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”

9-61
 ASSEMBLY DIAGRAM

Assembly Diagram 62 FUSEN1

Diagram symbol Circuit symbol Part name Part number Q’ty Remarks

Make connections for connectors.

DVI PWB Connector Destination for connection
POKX 2P ~ COVER PWB KX
POPN 6P ~ SET PS PN
POPL 12P ~ Ballast power PL
POXP 7P ~ IF TIMER XP
POPY 4P ~ SENSOR PWB PY
POPJ 4P ~ SET PS PJ
POCL 14P ~ CPU PWB CL
POPK 6P ~ SET PS PK
POCK 12P ~ CPU PWB CK
POP1 8P ~ SET PS P1
POPF 4P ~ MOTHER PWB PF (PO6117)
POCP 7P ~ CPU PWB CP
PO7001 13P ~ CPU PWB PM
PO7002 4P ~ Sirocco FAN
PO7003 3P ~ For the lamp house 120 FAN
POPD 6P ~ MOTOR PWB PD
POLAN 2P ~ ETHER PWB POLAN
POPH 3P ~ SET PS PH
POPG 4P ~ SET PS PG
PON10 10P ~ MOTHER PWB N10
PON11 11P ~ MOTHER PWB N11
POF1 3P ~ CPU unit side FAN
POF7 3P ~ Ballast power FAN
POF8 3P ~ Ballast power FAN
POKM 11P ~ FAN PWB POKM

CPU PWB Connector Destination for connection

DM 13P ~ MOTOR PWB DM

“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”

9-62
 ASSEMBLY DIAGRAM

Assembly Diagram 63 FMT FUREKI

Diagram symbol Circuit symbol Part name Part number Q’ty Remarks

Mount each connector of the FMT PWB on the connectors of the FIB BOARD that is located in the shield unit.
After mounting, the FIB BOARD shall be inserted firmly.

POKM21 ~ DIV PWB KM

The FPC shall be connected in the direction as shown below.
POKA1 ~ CPU unit prism side fan
POKC1 ~ Prism lower fan
POF21 ~ Side plate fan Acetate cloth tape Conductive cloth tape
POKS1 ~ FMT PWB side
POKT1 ~ RGB thermostat
FPC EFIB PWB side
POKU1 ~

10mm
10mm

“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”

9-63
 ASSEMBLY DIAGRAM

Assembly Diagram 64 FUSEN2

Diagram symbol Circuit symbol Part name Part number Q’ty Remarks

PRT1 BAND (L=100) 24280701 6

Make connections for connectors and bundle the surplus part of wires.

PRT1
PRT1 FAN/PY
Connectors for FAN, etc.
PRT1
FAN 2 connector

PRT1
Thermostat connector

PRT1
PRT1 DM/PD/FAN/PJ
PH/PG/N10/N11

“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”

9-64
 ASSEMBLY DIAGRAM

Assembly Diagram 65 CPU Unit cover

Diagram symbol Circuit symbol Part name Part number Q’ty Remarks

PRT1 SHIELD CASE (TI) D 24H51922 1

PRT2 CUSHION (60*15*T3) 24J26451 2
SRW036 SPECIAL SCREW (M4*14) 24N07492 2 Torque : 12~14kg•cm

PRT3 GASKET (STG-10-10) 24C05351 260mm•••1pc

PRT4 CN WIRE 200W, BRAID 7NN1N034

SRW010 PL-CPIMS*4*10*3KF 24V00461 2 Torque : 12~14kg•cm

PRT5 GASKET (STG8-10) 24C05341 L=90 x 3

PRT6 ACETATE CROSS TAPE 570*30 92203063 L=90 x 3

Stick cushions and gaskets to inside of the shield case.

Gasket (STG-10-10) 260mm • • • 1pc. (STG8-10) 90mm • • • 3pcs.

Never clog the screw hole of Adhesion B.

PRT2 PRT5 PRT6

PRT1

Adhesion A
PRT3
Never clog the hole.

Mount the CN round item between the fitting metal (DIV) and the shield case (TI).

SRW036 x2

PRT4
PRT4

SRW010 x2

“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”

9-65
 ASSEMBLY DIAGRAM

Assembly Diagram 66 IO PWB

Diagram symbol Circuit symbol Part name Part number Q’ty Remarks

PRT1 BRACKET (CTL) 24H50271 1

SRW030 PL-CPIMS*4*10*3KF 24V00461 6 Torque : 12~14kg•cm

GASKET (STG10-10) 24C05351 L=360mm x 2 pcs.

GASKET (STG13-10) 24C05361 L=360mm x 2 pcs.

Mount the I/O PWB on the mounting bracket.

Cut the gasket and stick it. STG-10-10 360mm ... 2 pcs., STG13-10 360mm ... 2 pcs.

STG10-10
Upper side

PRT1 STG13-10
Lower side

Stick the gasket STG13-10 to the bottom surface, adjusted to

the corner.
Stick the gasket STG10-10 to the bottom surface, overlapped STG10-10
To be stuck to the
on STG13-10. STG13-10
side surface
To be stuck to the
Attach the mounting bracket to the set. bottom surface

SRW030
6 positions

The connector from P01F of the

CPU PWB should be led out of
this hole and connected to PO1F4.

“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”

9-66
 ASSEMBLY DIAGRAM

Assembly Diagram 67 Control

Diagram symbol Circuit symbol Part name Part number Q’ty Remarks

PRT1 BRACKET (KEY) 24H57781 1

CN1 CN8P(LC) 60W, 1061-24 7NW8W024 1

PWB1 LCD_MODULE ASSY 81H08L01 1

PRT2 SRW012 WASHER(D8, T2.5) 24J28631 4

SRW098 CBIMS*2*6*3KF 24V00191 4 Torque : 1.8~2.0kg•cm

PWB2 PJKEY PWB ASSY 81L23ZA1 1

SRW097 PL-CPIMS*3*8*3GF 24V00111 4 Torque : 5~7kg•cm

SRW098 PL-CPIMS*3*8*3GF 24V00111 4 Torque : 5~7kg•cm

PRT5 SHIELD(LED) 24J28621 1

Mount the buttons, LCD MODULE, KEY PWB, Décor plate, and the handles on the mounting bracket and connect the connectors.

The connector from POIF of the CPU PWB

shall have been inserted in POIF of the KEY PWB.
(It shall be exactly locked.)

PRT2
CN1 X2
1
16 Pay attention to insertion pins.

PWB1
SRW097
7 positions
SRW098
4 positions

PWB2

PRT2
Stick protection sheets according to
the mounting holes in 4 positions.

PRT3
Adhesion of shields (LED) shall be such that four LEDs are
positioned in the center in a well-balanced condition.

“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”

9-67
 ASSEMBLY DIAGRAM

Assembly Diagram 68 Control Mt

Diagram symbol Circuit symbol Part name Part number Q’ty Remarks

PRT1 DECOR PLATE (KEY) 24K26281 1

PRT2 HANDLE (A-1046-3) 24C08521 2

SRW019 CTIMS*2.5*6*3GF 24V00631 4 Torque : 3~4kg•cm

PRT3 GASKET (STG10-10) 24C05351 L=140mm x 1 pc.

SRW029 SPECIAL SCREW (M4*25) 24N07302 4 Torque : 12~14kg•cm

PL-CPIMS*4*10*3KF 24V00461 6

Mount the ornament and handle, and connect the connectors.

PRT1
Stick it according to
the hole positions.

SRW29
4 positions

PRT2

PRT2

SRW109
Fasten the handle
in 4 positions,
from rear side.

GASKEY (STG10-10) L=140mm ••• 1pc.

PRT3
Stick it to the fitting metal (CLT).
Never let it overlap the screw area.

“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”

9-68
 ASSEMBLY DIAGRAM

Assembly Diagram 69 Lamp

Diagram symbol Circuit symbol Part name Part number Q’ty Remarks

PRT1 BRACKET (TIMER) L 24H50221 1

PWB LROM PWB ASSY 81L19L01 1

SRW096 CBIMS*2*6*3KF 24V00191 1 Torque : 2.5~3.5kg•cm

LAMP LAMP HOUSE (6K) NA 1

SRW025 PL-CPIMS*3*8*3GF 24V00111 2 Torque : 5~7kg•cm

PRT2 GASKET (STG2-5) 24C08001 460mm x 1, 250mm x 1, 190mm x 1, 130mm x 1

PRT3 GASKET (STG6-10) 24C07261 60mm x 1

Mount the LROM PWB ASSY on the mounting bracket and mount the assemblies on the lamp.

PWB SRW096

SRW025
2 positions

LAMP

PRT1

Mount the lamp on the SET and fix it with screws.

Cut a gasket for adhesion.
460mm ••• 1pc., 250mm ••• 1pc., 190mm ••• 1pc., 130mm ••• 1pc.

SAFETY
PRT2
250mm

PRT3
60mm

PRT2
130mm Tighten the lamp screws. PRT2
190mm

PRT3
PRT2 460mm 60mm
The left hotchpotch

“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”

9-69
 ASSEMBLY DIAGRAM

Assembly Diagram 70 Lamp cover1

Diagram symbol Circuit symbol Part name Part number Q’ty Remarks

PRT1 DUCT(LAMP)ASSY 24HS3701 1

PRT2 DUCT COVER 24H52711 1

PRT3 SPRING HINGE(TH-61SUS) 24C08011 1

SRW131 PL-CPIMS*3*8*3GF 24V00111 4 Torque : 5~7kg•cm

PRT4 NET F 24H53111 1

SRW137 CBIMS*2*6*3KF 24V00191 2 Torque : 2.5~3.5kg•cm

PRT5 LABEL(LAMP) 24L56451 1

Mount the cover on the duct by means of sprung hinges.

SAFETY

SRW131
4 poitions

PRT1

PRT2

PRT3

Fit a net to the duct and fix it with screws.

SAFETY

PRT4
Fitted from inside.

SRW137
1 position each on
both sides

Adhesion of the label

SAFETY

PRT5

“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”

9-70
 ASSEMBLY DIAGRAM

Assembly Diagram 71 Lamp cover2

Diagram symbol Circuit symbol Part name Part number Q’ty Remarks

PRT1 COVER (LAMP) 24P04132 1

SRW069 SCREW (M4*14) 24N07492 4 Torque : 12~14kg•cm

PRT3 COLLAR (CX-403) 24C07631 4

PRT4 SHEET (LC1) 24J25341 1

PRT2 DUCT (LAMP) ASSY 1

SRW120 PIWA*4*3GF 24V00661 4
SRW122 AHEXIN*4*3GF 24V00641 4 Torque : 12~14kg•cm
PRT5 GASKET (STG5-5) 24C07991 180mm x 1, 150mm x 1, 120mm x 2

Mount a specific screw on the cover.

SRW069
4 positions

PRT1

Stick a sheet to inside of the cover.

Put a collar.
PRT3
4 positions

PRT4

Put the duct on the collar that has been put in advance. Fasten it with washers and nuts.
Stick gaskets and sheets to the duct.
STG5-5 180mm ••• 1pc., 150mm ••• 1pc., 120mm ••• 2pcs.

SRW120 PRT5
SRW122 180mm
4 positions for each

PRT5 PRT5
120mm 120mm

PRT2

PRT5
150mm

“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”

9-71
 ASSEMBLY DIAGRAM

Assembly Diagram 72 Lamp cover3

Diagram symbol Circuit symbol Part name Part number Q’ty Remarks

SRW069 SCREW (M4*14) 4 Torque : 10~12kg•cm

(This screw with Lamp cover)

Mount the cover on the SET.

SRW069
4 positions

“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”

9-72
 ASSEMBLY DIAGRAM

Assembly Diagram 73 Rear panel

Diagram symbol Circuit symbol Part name Part number Q’ty Remarks

PRT1 REAR PANEL 24P04251 1

PRT2 SHEET (R1) 24J25351 1

PRT3 SHEET (R2) 24J25361 1

PRT4 HANDLE (THA-31SUS-5) 24C08531 2

SRW110 PL-CPIMS*5*12*3GF 24V00611 4 Torque : 16~18kg•cm

Stick the sheet to the rear panel.

Adjust here.

Adjust here.
PRT2

PRT3
PRT1
Apply.

Mount the handle on the rear panel.

SRW110
4 positions
PRT4

“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”

9-73
 ASSEMBLY DIAGRAM

Assembly Diagram 74 Rearpanel Mt

Diagram symbol Circuit symbol Part name Part number Q’ty Remarks

SRW050 PL-CPIMS*4*10*3KF 24V00461 4 Torque : 12~14kg•cm

SRW051 P-CPIMS*4*20*3KF 24V00561 2 Torque : 12~14kg•cm

Mount the rear panel on the SET.

SRW050
4 positions

SRW051
2 positions

“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”

9-74
 ASSEMBLY DIAGRAM

Assembly Diagram 75 LEFT Panel1

Diagram symbol Circuit symbol Part name Part number Q’ty Remarks

PRT1 SIDE PANEL LR 24P04262 1

PRT2 FILTER (LR) 24J24381 1

PRT3 BRACKET (FILTER) 24H50391 1

SRW038 PL-CPIMS*3*8*3GF 24V00111 4 Torque : 5~7kg•cm

PRT4 SHEET (SLB1) 24J25291 1

PRT5 SHEET (SLB2) 24J25301 1

PRT6 SHEET (SLB3) 24J25311 1

PRT7 SHEET (SLB4) 24J24321 1

PRT8 SHEET (SLB5) 24J25411 1

Mount the filter on the side panel LR.

PRT3
PRT8
PRT2

SRW038
4 positions

PRT1

PRT5

PRT7

PRT4

PRT6

“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”

9-75
 ASSEMBLY DIAGRAM

Assembly Diagram 76 LEFT Panel2

Diagram symbol Circuit symbol Part name Part number Q’ty Remarks

PRT1 SIDE PANEL LF ASSY 24PS5161 1

SRW052 SPECIAL SCREW (P-CPIMS*4*65) 24N07312 3 Torque : 12~14kg•cm

SRW068 P-CPIMS*4*20*3KF 24V00561 4 Torque : 12~14kg•cm

GASKET (STG2-10) 24C06051 200mm•••1pc.

GASKET (STG1-7) 24C05331 200mm•••1pc, 220mm•••1pc.

GASKET (STG8-10) 24C05341 90mm•••2pcs.

GASKET (STG9-10) 24C07271 80mm•••1pc.

SRW028 PL-CPIMS*3*8*3KF 24V00581 2 Torque : 5~7kg•cm

Stick a gasket to the side panel LF.

STG2-10 200mm ••• 1pc. STG8-10 90mm • • • 2pcs.
STG1-7 200mm ••• 1pc., 220mm ••• 1pc. STG9-10 80mm • • • 2pcs.
STG8-10
90mm X2

STG1-7
200mm

STG1-7
220mm

STG2-10
200mm

STG9-10
80mm X2

Mount the side panel on the set.

SRW052
3 positions
SRW068
4 positions

SRW028
2 positions

PRT1
Side panel
LR Assy

“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”

9-76
 ASSEMBLY DIAGRAM

Assembly Diagram 77 Shielding RF

Diagram symbol Circuit symbol Part name Part number Q’ty Remarks

PRT1 SHIELDING PLATE (RF) 24H51722 1

SRW129 PL-CPIMS*3*8*3GF 24V00111 4 Torque : 5~7kg•cm

PRT2 COVER (FILTER) 24P04142 1

PRT3 FILTER (RF) 24J24391 1

SRW055 SPECIAL SCREW (M4*14) 24N07492 4 Torque : 12~14kg•cm

Mount the shielding plate.

SRW129
3 positions

PRT1

Mount the special screws on the cover.

SRW055
4 positions

Mount the filter on the cover.

The arrow mark on the filter side surface shall be positioned as illustrated.

PRT3

PRT2

“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”

9-77
 ASSEMBLY DIAGRAM

Assembly Diagram 78 Side panel R1

Diagram symbol Circuit symbol Part name Part number Q’ty Remarks

PRT1 SIDE PANEL R ASSY 24PS4291 1

PRT2 BARRIER (EXHAUST) B 24J25621 1

PRT3 BARRIER (EXHAUST) C 24J25631 1

SRW090 RIVET, PUSH (NRP-345) 24C06931 2

PRT4 SHEET (SRF1) 24J25211 1

PRT5 SHEET (SRF2) 24J25221 1

PRT6 SHEET (SRF4) 24J25241 1

PRT7 SHEET (SRF5) 24J25251 1

PRT8 SHEET (SRF6) 24J25261 1

PRT9 SHEET (SRF7) 24J25271 1

PRT10 SHEET (SRR1) 24J25372 1

PRT11 SHEET (SRR2) 24J25382 1

PRT12 SHEET (SRR3) 24J25392 1

PRT13 SHEET (SRR4) 24J25422 1

PRT14 GASKET (STG9-10) 24C07271 680mm•••1pc.

Remove the peel-off paper and stick the barrier to the side panel. Fasten the barrier with the bush rivets.
After barrier mounting, stick a sheet to the side panel.
Cut the gasket and stick it. 680mm ... 1 pc.
PRT7 PRT6 PRT11 PRT12
PRT14
Give notches to these
PRT5 parts of PRT11.

PRT9

PRT10

PRT4

PRT13

PRT5

PRT8 PRT1

PRT2
Outside

SRW090
2 positions

PRT3
Inside

“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”

9-78
 ASSEMBLY DIAGRAM

Assembly Diagram 79 Side panel R2

Diagram symbol Circuit symbol Part name Part number Q’ty Remarks

PRT1 BARRIER (EXHAUST) A 24J25611 1

SRW099 RIVET, PUSH (NRP-345) 24C06931 3

Fasten the barrier with the bush rivets.

SRW099

PRT1

“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”

9-79
 ASSEMBLY DIAGRAM

Assembly Diagram 80 Side panel R3

Diagram symbol Circuit symbol Part name Part number Q’ty Remarks

SRW067 P-CPIMS*4*20*3KF 24V00561 6 Torque : 12~14kg•cm

Mount the side panel assemblies and the cover (filter) on the SET.

Torque : 12~14kgf•cm SRW067

6 positions

“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”

9-80
 ASSEMBLY DIAGRAM

Assembly Diagram 81 Lens hood1

Diagram symbol Circuit symbol Part name Part number Q’ty Remarks

PRT1 SHIELD BOARD A 24H57921 1

PRT2 SHIELD BOARD B 24H51422 2

PRT3 SHIELD BOARD C 24H51432 2

PRT4 SHIELD BOARD (NC800) ASSY 24HS4141 1

PRT5 SHIELDING SHEET (LENS) 24J24641 1

SRW044 PL-CPIMS*3*8*3GF 24V00111 2 Torque : 5~7kg•cm

PRT6 BARRIA (LENS) 24J22941 1

SRW136 PL-CPIMS*3*8*3GF 24V00111 2 Torque : 5~7kg•cm

Assemble the shield boards.

The shielding sheet shall be sandwiched by the shield boards and fixed.

*1
PRT3
The shielding sheet
is sandwiched.
SRW044
PRT1

PRT2

The side with a longer

spacing is positioned on
the same side where a PRT5
window is located.
Mounting should be free from twisting.
Twisting can be avoided if the joint part
is adjusted to the corner.
PRT3

SRW044
The shielding sheet
is sandwiched.

* Completed Assy as seen from the direction of 1

PRT4

PRT2

PRT6
SRW044 X3

“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”

9-81
 ASSEMBLY DIAGRAM

Assembly Diagram 82 Lens hood2

Diagram symbol Circuit symbol Part name Part number Q’ty Remarks

PRT1 GASKET (STG2-10) 24C06051 40mm•••2pcs., 20mm•••2pcs.

Cut the gasket and stick it to the lens hood.

40mm ... 4 pc., 20mm ... 2 pcs.

PRT1 40mmX2
PRT1 20mmX2

“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”

9-82
 ASSEMBLY DIAGRAM

Assembly Diagram 83 Lens hood Mt

Diagram symbol Circuit symbol Part name Part number Q’ty Remarks

SRW045 CBIMS*4*8*3GF 24V00551 3 Torque : 12~14kg•cm

Mount the lens hood assemblies on the SET.

Lens hood assemblies

Install engine's open connector

(for lens movement) in this hole.
(It shall be locked.)

SRW045
3 positions

“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”

9-83
 ASSEMBLY DIAGRAM

Assembly Diagram 84 Front panel

Diagram symbol Circuit symbol Part name Part number Q’ty Remarks

PRT1 FRONT PANEL ASSY 24PS4301 1

PRT2 SHEET (F1) 24J25171 1

PRT3 GASKET (STG10-10) 24C05351

PRT4 GASKET (STG9-10) 24C07271

SRW049 PL-CPIMS*4*10*3KF 24V00461 4 Torque : 12~14kg•cm

SRW043 PL-CPIMS*3*8*3GF 24V00111 4 Torque : 5~7kg•cm

Stick a sheet to inside of the front panel ASSY.

Cut the gasket and stick it.
STG10-10 450mm ... 1 pc.
STG9-10 450mm ... 1 pc.

PRT3
PRT1
PRT2

Apply.

PRT4

40mm Join here.

SRW043
4 positions SRW049
4 positions

SRW139

“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”

9-84
 ASSEMBLY DIAGRAM

Assembly Diagram 85 Lens cover

Diagram symbol Circuit symbol Part name Part number Q’ty Remarks

PRT1 LENS HOOD A 24F39911 2

PRT2 BRACKET (LH) 24H51501 4

SRW033 P-#2CBRTS*3*10*3GF 24V00671 4 Torque : 5~7kg•cm

SRW034 SCR (M4*25) 24N07612 2 Torque : 12~14kg•cm

PRT3 SPRING (LENS HOOD) 24H52341 2

Attach the mounting bracket to inside of the lens hood (2 sets).

Inside of the lens hood

PRT1

PRT2
PRT2
SRW033

SRW034
Mount the M4*25 screws from outside of the lens hood through the springs.

Lens hood outside

PRT3

Mount the lens hood on the set.

“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”

9-85
 ASSEMBLY DIAGRAM

Assembly Diagram 86 Top panel

Diagram symbol Circuit symbol Part name Part number Q’ty Remarks

PRT1 TOP COVER R 24P05031 1

PRT2 SHEET (TR) 24J25201 1

PRT3 TOP COVER F ASSY 24PS4311 1

PRT4 SHEET (TF1) 24J29411 1

PRT5 SHEET (TF2) 24J25192 1

PRT6 GASKET (STG2-10) 24C06051 STG2-10 130mm•••1pc., 100mm•••1pc.,

30mm•••1pc., 210mm•••1pc.

PRT7 GASKET (STG10-10) 24C05351 STG10-10 435mm•••1pc., 220mm•••2pcs.

PRT8 GASKET (STG9-10) 24C07271 STG9-10 220mm•••2pcs.

PRT9 GASKET (STG13-10) 24C05361 STG13-10 420•••2pcs.

SRW053 P-CPIMS*4*20*3KF 24V00561 6 Torque : 12~14kg•cm

SRW054 P-CPIMS*4*20*3KF 24V00561 2 Torque : 12~14kg•cm

Stick a sheet to each top cover. Cut the gasket and stick it.
STG2-10 130mm ... 1 pc., 100mm ...12 ps., 30mm ... 1 pc., 210mm ... 1 ps. STG9-10 220mm ... 2 pcs.
STG-10-10 435mm ... 1 pc., 220mm ... 2 pcs. STG-13-10 420mm ... 2 pcs
PRT7
220mm
PRT7 PRT9 PRT9
Adjust it to the corner. 420mm
435mm PRT6 420mm
210mm

PRT2

PRT3 PRT5

PRT4
PRT6 PRT6
130mm 100mm PRT6
PRT1
30mm

PRT8
220mm
Mount the top cover R and the top cover F on the set in this order.

PRT1

SRW056
6 positions SRW054
2 positions

“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”

9-86
 ASSEMBLY DIAGRAM

Assembly Diagram 87 Label

Diagram symbol Circuit symbol Part name Part number Q’ty Remarks

PRT1 CAUTION LABEL (LENS 4) 24L60881 1

PRT2 INSTRUTION NAME PLATE 24L60891 1

PRT3 LABEL, SERIAL MANUFACTURE 24L55991 1

PRT4 PC-DUMMY-CARD WT 24FT8872 1

Stick the label to the set.

PRT1
Direction in which
characters can be
read as seen from SAFETY
lens side
Provide an opening of about 10mm
from the edge of the front panel.

Adjust the label center

to the lens center.

PRT2
• Secure the top and
bottom clearances, SAFETY
almost unified.
• Adjust it to the green
line of the lamp cover.

PRT3

“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”

9-87
 ASSEMBLY DIAGRAM

Assembly Diagram 88 Cap

Diagram symbol Circuit symbol Part name Part number Q’ty Remarks

PRT1 CAP 24J25081 1

After the completion of inspection, remove the lens that has been used as a jig. Mount a cap.

PRT1

“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”

9-88
 PACKAGING

Packing Details 1.

Carton box T
(24M19591)
The top plane shall be fastened with
Type H clear tapes. (System P)

Accessory box
(24M19631)
Serviceing bag ASSY

Spacer T
(24M19611) Front side
(Stamped on the face)

Cap (24J25081) inserted

Protection bag (1920*1500)

(12804441)
(Covered from the bottom)

Spacer B
(24M19621) Front side

Carton box B
(24M19601)
PP band
(To be tightened from the outside)

Lasty, wind the PP band and tighten it with the stopper (PP band) (24282431).

“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”

10-1
 PACKAGING

Packing Details 2.
• Label sticking position (* The front surface is defined as the lens side of the set.)

Label (carton) T (24L61051) to be stuck

(The PP band shall not overlap the clear tape.)

(150)
T
ON
Fro FR
nts
ide

Label (carton) R (24L61011) to be stuck

Right side (Never overlap the PP band.)
(150)

FR
ON
T
de
nt si
Fro

Label (carton) R (24L61001) to be stuck

(Never overlap the PP band.) Left side

Necessary matters shall be printed on the bar-code serial label (16761791) and this label shall be stuck to
the label (carton) L (24L61001) that is to be stuck to the left side of the cardboard.
(Stuck inside the [ ]) (The contents of printing shall conform to the instructions given by the Production
Enginering Division.)

∗ 0 1 1 5 4 0 3 3 ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗
N C 8 0 0 C

“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”

10-2
 REPLACEMENT PART LIST

Notes:
1. When ordering the maintenance parts, please confirm the model name, part number, and the column of remarks.
2. When ordering the maintenance parts, please compare the projector main unit with descriptions in the service manual. Ordering should be
made in accordance with the correct parts numbers.
3. If a mark of is attached to the head of a part number, this part is concerned with safety.
4. If a mark of “NPF” is attached to the head of a part number, this part is not concerned with maintenance. (No inventory and no procurement)
5. If a mark of (*) is attached to the head of a part number, this part is not concerned with inventory servicing. (No inventory and no procurement)
• Since the frequency of usage is extremely low, such an item is not registered in some cases.
• Some parts can be registered as required. However, such registration depends of the frequency of usage. Please let us know the quantity
required and make inquiries about prices.

1. NC800C
Symbol Part No. Description Remark
*** PWB Assys ***
MOTOR 81L19D03 MOTOR PWB ASSY
LROM 81L19L01 LROM PWB ASSY
CPU 81L23C01 CPU_PWB PWB ASSY
EFIB 81L23E03 EFIB_PWB PWB ASSY
DIV 81L23HB1 DIV PWB ASSY
AC 81L23HC1 AC PWB ASSY
C 81L23KC1 C PWB ASSY
FAN 81L23KD1 FAN PWB ASSY
I/O 81L23KG1 I/O PWB ASSY
SENSOR 81L23KH1 SENSOR PWB ASSY
IF-TIMER 81L23KJ1 IF-TIMER PWB ASSY
COVER 81L23KU1 COVER PWB ASSY
LCD 81L23L01 LCD_MODULE ASSY
MOTHER 81L23M02 MOTHER_PWB PWB ASSY
PJKEY 81L23ZA2 PJKEY PWB ASSY
ETHER 81L23ZB2 ETHER PWB ASSY
GPIO 81L23ZE2 GPIIO PWB ASSY
INTER 7N950851 INTERFACE 2506940-0002
PROCES 7N950861 PROCESSOR 2506937-0002

*** Electrical part & Miscellaneous part ***

3N100931 IGNITER (SS-50GMSR)
3N100941 POWER SUPPLY
3N100951 POWERUNIT ZWS50AF-5/J HFP
3N100961 POWER SUPPLY-DC
3N170052 FAN MOTOR D06R-24TH 34B
3N170078 FAN MOTOR D07F-24SG19B
3N170080 FAN MOTOR D12E-24PH 10B
3N170084 FAN MOTOR D12E-24PH **A
3N170097 DCFAN 3112KL
3N170103 DCFAN MBD10-24S-F3
3N810007 EF1F103A2-40065
6N120099 FILTERS MXB1220-33 HFP
6N500015 CP52B-F020
NSP 6N550009 SW SSCTL10400
7N120003 INLET 1621-X-9990-A-1
7N120006 EARTH TERMINAL S-Q0204#12
7N120007 TERMINAL SK10-4J UL
7N120008 TERMINAL SK10-2S
7N510023 CABLE FPC 8-N00-127-12
* 7N520058 CABLE LAN 0.33M PCRJE0033
* 7N520063 CABLE LAN 0.60M PCRJE0060
* 7N530028 LAMP CABLE(L=340)(E)
7N970026 THERMOSTAT CS-7L-75
* 7NB2W002 "CN2P-WP(LM) 170W,1007-22"
* 7NB7B008 "CN7P 200W,1007-22"
* 7NB9B003 "CN9P(N8) 200W,1007-22"
* 7NM3N003 "CN3P(KV) 290-180W,1015-20"
* 7NN1N028 "CN WIRE(G) 100W,1015-18"
* 7NN1N029 "CN WIRE 250W,1283-6"
* 7NN1N034 "CN WIRE 200W,BRAID"

“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”

11-1
 REPLACEMENT PART LIST
*** Electrical part & Miscellaneous part ***
* 7NN1N035 "CN WIRE 150W,1015-18"
* 7NN1W006 "CN WIRE(IG1) 300W,1015-18"
* 7NN1W007 "CN WIRE(IG2) 200W,1015-18"
* 7NN1W008 "CN WIRE(G) 140W,1015-12"
* 7NN2N002 "CN2P(AC) 130W,1015-12"
* 7NN2W006 "CN2P(AC) 140W,1015-12"
* 7NW0W015 "CN10P(N10) 280W,1007-18"
* 7NW0W016 "CN10P(N11) 280W,1007-18"
* 7NW1N002 "CN1P(PSG) 100W,1015-14"
NSP 7NW20038 "CN2P 210S,1061-26"
* 7NW2W028 "CN2P(KX) 600W,1061-26"
* 7NW2W032 "CN2P(LAN) 650W,1061-24"
* 7NW3B001 "CN3P(FAN) 400W,1007-24"
* 7NW3W047 "CN3P(PH) 780W,1015-14"
* 7NW3W050 "CN3P(PV) 900W,1015-12"
* 7NW3W066 "CN3P(CB)100W,1061-26"
* 7NW3W067 "CN3P(PW) 200W,1015-12"
* 7NW3W068 "CN3-5P(PU) 570W,1015-18"
* 7NW3W069 "CN3P(PT) 700W,1015-12"
* 7NW3W077 "CN3P(FAN)160W,1061-24"
* 7NW4N002 "CN4P(IL) 250W,1061-26"
* 7NW4W032 "CN4P(PG) 740W,1015-14"
* 7NW4W033 "CN4P(PJ) 500W,1007-18"
* 7NW4W034 "CN4-5P(PF1) 280W,1571-26"
* 7NW4W039 "CN4P(PY) 1200W,1061-26"
* 7NW6W024 "CN6P(PD) 230W,1571-26"
* 7NW6W025 "CN6P(PN) 420W,1007-18"
* 7NW6W026 "CN6P(PK) 450W,1571-26"
* 7NW7W017 "CN7P(XP) 800W,1061-26"
* 7NW7W023 "CN7P(CP1) 250W,1007-24"
* 7NW8W019 "CN8-10P(P1) 500W,1571-26"
* 7NW8W024 "CN8P(LC)60W,1061-24"
* 7NW8W028 "CN8P(CI) 900W,1061-24"
* 7NW9W006 "CN9P(CT)400W,1061-26"
* 7NWAW002 "CN11P(KM) 350W,1061-26"
* 7NWBW010 "CN12P(PL) 500W,1061-26"
* 7NWBW011 "CN12P(CK1) 150W,1571-26"
* 7NWCW007 "CN13P(DM) 350W,1571-26"
* 7NWCW008 "CN13-7P(PM) 300W,1061-26"
* 7NWDW012 "CN14P(CL1) 120W,1571-26"
* 7NWDW016 "CN14P(CO) 470W,1061-28"
* 7NWE0001 "CN15P 30S,1061-24"
* 7NWLW040 "CN40P(IF) 600W,1571-28"
* 7NWLW044 "CN37-40P(GP)390W,1571-28"
82M60691 SW SASSY

*** Appearance part ***

* 12265641 GUARD(FAN)
NSP 12JS7462 LAMP HOUSE(6K)
12JS7471 NOTCH FILTER(IS8)
NSP 12JT1241 PRISM ASSEMBLY(IS8 50MICR
* 16287421 WIRE SADDLE(C)
* 16761791 SERIAL LABEL
24280701 BAND (L=100)
24BS6792 CONNECTOR
* 24BS7212 HANDLE
24BS7361 OPTICAL ENGINE(DC2K)
24BS7611 LENS MOUNT(IS25)
* 24BS7681 ENGINE ASSY(NC800)
* 24C02751 GUIDE RAIL
24C02841 CABLE CLIP(FCA-10)
24C04131 FINGER GURD
24C04371 EDGE SADDLE
* 24C05331 GASKET(STG1-7)
* 24C05341 GASKET(STG8-10)
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
11-2
 REPLACEMENT PART LIST
*** Appearance part ***
* 24C05351 GASKET(STG10-10)
* 24C05361 GASKET(STG13-10)
* 24C06051 GASKET(STG2-10)
* 24C06931 "RIVET,PUSH(NRP-345)"
* 24C06931 "RIVET,PUSH(NRP-345)"
* 24C07261 GASKET(STG6-10)
* 24C07271 GASKET(STG9-10)
* 24C07631 COLLAR(CX-403)
* 24C07641 GROMMET(MG-4)
* 24C07991 GASKET(STG5-5)
* 24C08001 GASKET(STG2-5)
* 24C08011 SPRING HINGE(TH-61SUS)
* 24C08421 GUARD(FAN)(80)
* 24C08521 HANDLE(A-1046-3)
* 24C08531 HANDLE(THA-31SUS-5)
* 24C08951 BUSH(TB-1216)
* 24F33832 FOOT
* 24F39911 LENS HOOD A
24FT8872 PC-DUMMY-CARD WT
* 24H38091 WIRE(PS)
* 24H46901 PLATE(BNC)
* 24H49971 SIDE PLATE R
* 24H50051 BRACKET(SPS)
* 24H50061 BRACKET(STPS)
* 24H50121 BRACKET(LMP)L
* 24H50131 BRACKET(LMP)R
* 24H50141 BRACKET(CONNECTOR)
* 24H50151 BRACKET(ACPWB)
* 24H50161 BRACKET(SW)
* 24H50181 BRACKET(PSC)
* 24H50211 BRACKET(COV)
* 24H50221 BRACKET(TIMER)L
* 24H50231 BRACKET(TIMER)S
* 24H50271 BRACKET(CTL)
* 24H50291 BRACKET(THERMISTOR)
* 24H50351 COVER BOARD(LAMP)
* 24H50391 BRACKET(FILTER)
* 24H50401 COVER(SIDE R)F
* 24H51422 SHIELD BOARD B
* 24H51432 SHIELD BOARD C
* 24H51481 BRACKET(L EXHAUST)
* 24H51501 BRACKET(LH)
* 24H51662 BRACKET(F-PWB)
* 24H51691 CASE(JF120)
* 24H51703 FOOT BASE
* 24H51764 FIXING PLATE(FL)
* 24H51774 FIXING PLATE(FR)
* 24H51783 FIXING PLATE(RL)
* 24H51792 FIXING PLATE(RR)
* 24H51801 SIDE PLATE L
* 24H51811 REINFORCEMENT BRACKET F
* 24H51821 BRACKET(MOTOR)
* 24H51831 BRACKET(SEN)
* 24H51841 BRACKET(S100)
* 24H51851 BRACKET(D07F)
* 24H51861 BRACKET(DIV)
* 24H51871 BRACKET(IG)
* 24H51881 SHIELDING PLATE(LR)
* 24H51891 HOLDING BRACKET(PS)
* 24H51901 SHIELD CASE(TI)B
* 24H51922 SHIELD CASE(TI)D
* 24H51982 L ANGLE
* 24H52291 HEATSINK(M5120)
* 24H52301 BRACKET(HS BASE)
* 24H52311 PLATE(TAP)
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
11-3
 REPLACEMENT PART LIST

*** Appearance part ***

* 24H52341 SPRING(LENS HOOD)
* 24H52351 PARTITION PLATE(PS)
* 24H52711 DUCT COVER
* 24H52721 FILTER PLATE A
* 24H52731 FILTER PLATE B
* 24H52761 NET C
* 24H53091 NET D
* 24H53101 NET E
* 24H53111 NET F
* 24H53161 SMALL IRIS
* 24H57751 BRACKET(MAIN)
* 24H57761 BRACKET(GP)
* 24H57771 SHIELD CASE(TI)C
* 24H57782 BRACKET(KEY)
* 24H57921 SHIELD BOARD A
* 24H58021 BRACKET(F80)
* 24H58032 COVER(TISW CABLE)
* 24H59151 SHIELDING PLATE(RF)800
* 24HS3591 DUCT(L INHALATION)ASSY
* 24HS3701 DUCT(LAMP)ASSY
* 24HS3711 DUCT(L EXHAUST)ASSY
* 24HS3722 CHASSIS BASE ASSY
* 24HS3731 BRACKET(LPS) ASSY
* 24HS3761 PARTITION BOARD(LMP) ASSY
* 24HS3771 REINFORCE BRACKET R ASSY
* 24HS4141 SHIELD BOARD(NC800)ASSY
* 24HS4151 SHIELD CASE(TI)A ASSY
* 24J23621 GASKET(USB)
* 24J24362 PLATE(LMP)
* 24J24372 PLATE(CONNECTOR)
24J24381 FILTER(LR)
24J24391 FILTER(RF)
* 24J24621 BARRIER(STPS)
* 24J24631 BARRIER(MOTOR)
* 24J24641 SHIELDING SHEET(LENS)
* 24J25071 COLLAR(CX-302B)
24J25081 CAP
* 24J25171 SHEET(F1)
* 24J25192 SHEET(TF2)
* 24J25201 SHEET(TR)
* 24J25211 SHEET(SRF1)
* 24J25221 SHEET(SRF2)
* 24J25241 SHEET(SRF4)
* 24J25251 SHEET(SRF5)
* 24J25261 SHEET(SRF6)
* 24J25271 SHEET(SRF7)
* 24J25291 SHEET(SLB1)
* 24J25301 SHEET(SLB2)
* 24J25311 SHEET(SLB3)
* 24J25321 SHEET(SLB4)
* 24J25341 SHEET(LC1)
* 24J25351 SHEET(R1)
* 24J25361 SHEET(R2)
* 24J25372 SHEET(SRR1)
* 24J25382 SHEET(SRR2)
* 24J25392 SHEET(SRR3)
* 24J25411 SHEET(SLB5)
* 24J25422 SHEET(SRR4)
* 24J25611 BARRIER(EXHAUST)A
* 24J25621 BARRIER(EXHAUST)B
* 24J25631 BARRIER(EXHAUST)C
* 24J25792 SHEET(HD1)
* 24J25802 SHEET(HD2)
* 24J25833 SHEET(HD5)
* 24J25852 SHEET(HD7)
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
11-4
 REPLACEMENT PART LIST

*** Appearance part ***

* 24J25982 SHEET(HD8)
* 24J26451 CUSHION(60*15*T3)
* 24J28621 SHIELD(LED)
* 24J28631 WASHER(D8-2.5)
* 24J29401 BARRIER(LENS)
* 24J29411 SHEET(TF1)
* 24J29781 CUSHION(10*18*T0.5)
24K26281 DECOR PLATE(KEY)
24K26291 DECOR PLATE(INPUT)
* 24K26301 DECOR PLATE(INPUT)B
* 24L55481 LABEL(SET PS)
* 24L55991 "LABEL,SERIAL MANUFACTURE"
* 24L56451 LABEL(LAMP)
* 24L60881 CAUTION LABEL(LENS 4)
* 24L60891 LABEL (NC800C)
* 24L61371 LABEL(NEC)
* 24N02981 PL-CPIMS*6*14*3KF
* 24N07302 SPECIAL SCREW(M4*25)
* 24N07312 SPECIAL SCREW(P-CPIMS*4)
* 24N07322 SPECIAL SCREW(M5*16)
* 24N07342 SPECIAL SCREW(M5*35)
* 24N07492 SPECIAL SCREW(M4*14)
* 24N07562 SCR(HHCS*6*16)
* 24N07612 SCR(M4*25)
* 24N08171 "NUT,FLANGE(M3)"
* 24N08192 STUD(D-SUB H*5.3)
* 24P04132 COVER(LAMP)
* 24P04142 COVER(FILTER)
* 24P04242 BRACKET(PC CABLE)
* 24P04262 SIDE PANEL LR
* 24P04281 COVER(S)
* 24P04931 COVER(TML)
* 24P05031 TOP COVER R
* 24P05051 REAR PANEL
* 24PS4291 SIDE PANEL R ASSY
* 24PS4301 FRONT PANEL ASSY
* 24PS4311 TOP COVER F ASSY
* 24PS5161 SIDE PANEL LF ASSY
* 24V00111 "SCREW,PL-CPIMS*3*8*3GF"
* 24V00121 "SCREW,PL-CPIMS*3*12*3KF"
* 24V00161 CBIMS*3*6*3KF
* 24V00191 CBIMS*2*6*3GF
* 24V00301 PL-CPIMS*3*25*3GF
* 24V00311 PL-CPIMS*3*20*3GF
* 24V00421 CFIMS*3*6*3KF
* 24V00461 PL-CPIMS*4*10*3KF
* 24V00531 PL-CPIMS*4*50*3KF
* 24V00561 P-CPIMS*4*20*3KF
* 24V00571 PL-CPIMS*3*6*3KF
* 24V00571 PL-CPIMS*3*6*3KF
* 24V00581 PL-CPIMS*3*8*3KF
* 24V00591 PL-CPIMS*4*8*3GF
* 24V00601 PL-CPIMS*4*25*3KF
* 24V00611 PL-CPIMS*5*12*3GF
* 24V00631 CTIMS*2.5*6*3GF
* 24V00641 AHEXIN*4*3GF
* 24V00661 PIWA*4*3GF
* 24V00671 P-#2CBRTS*3*10*3GF
* 24V00731 "SCREW,PL-CPIMS*3*40*3GF"
* 24V00931 PL-CPIMS*3*4*3GF
* 24V01031 CBIMS*2*8*3GF
25281281 EDGE SADDLE
25283461 EDGE SADDLE
25283991 "CLAMPER,WIRE"
* 25815061 "BAG,POLYETHYLENE (270X370"
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
11-5
 REPLACEMENT PART LIST
*** Appearance part ***
82L23132 PRISM SASSY
92201082 "GLUE,SCREW LOCK"
* 92203063 ACETATE CROSS TAPE 570*30

*** Printed & Packing materials ***

* 12804441 PROTECTION BAG(1920*1500)
* 24282431 STOPPER
70800839 "POWER CORD (250V,15A)"
70810789 "POWER CORD (250V,15A)"
* 78047921 WARRANTY ENVELOPE(100*220
* 92203030 CELLO TAPE 24W*35M
* 92203187 "TYPE,PP 60MM*50M"
* 92203857 "BAND,P.PROPYLEN 15.5MM"
* 24BS7661 LENS ADAPTER
* 24H47201 WIRE(PS)(EURO)
* 24L51541 "LABEL(POWER CODE,JP)"
* 24L51551 "LABEL(POWER CODE,US)"
* 24L57641 LABEL(WEEE)(HR)
* 24L60411 LABEL(10*30)
* 24L61002 LABEL(CARTON)L
* 24L61012 LABEL(CARTON)R
* 24L61051 LABEL(CARTON)T
* 24M19591 CARTON BOX T
* 24M19601 CARTON BOX B
* 24M19612 SPACER T
* 24M19621 SPACER B
* 24M19632 PARTS BOX
* 6N800008 BATTERY ALKLINE(GP15A)AA
7N080006 POWER CODE E3 250V 16A
7N520019 "CABLE,REMOTE CONTROLLER"
7N520057 CABLE REMOTE CONTROL 16M
* 7N8P0026 PROJECTOR WARRANTY
* 7N8P6411 NC800C USER MANUAL(J)
* 7N8P6421 NC800C USER MANUAL(E)
7N900124 REM-T HAND UNIT RD-371E

*** OPTICAL JIG ***

24HS4201 HANDLE(PRISM)ASSY

“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”

11-6
 CONNECTION DIAGRAMS

EHTER PWB P0DA#1-5 P0DA#1-5 LENS MOUNT

POLAN#1-2 MOTOR PWB
P0DB#1-14 P0DB#1-14
P0DC#1-15 P0DC#1-15 MOTO MOTO
M8301 P0DM1#1-13
P0DO#1-9 P0DO#1-9 MOTO MOTO
M8306 P0PD1#1-6

M8307 LAN PORT

Interface PROCESSOR
BOARD BOARD EFIB PWB
LCD PWB

PO6020#1-208

A3J1#1-208

PO6018#1-208

A2J1#1-208

PO6016#1-120

FMT_R PWB
P0J1R#1-

POJ1#1-120
J11#1-50
POLC#1-16
J8#1-50 P0J2R#1-

J5#1-7 P0J3R#1-7
SCAP PWB POLC#1-16 PO6005#1-40 PO6005#1-40
KEY PWB GPIO PWB

FMT_G PWB
POCB2#1-3 P0J10#1-50 P0J1G#1-

PO6021#1-208

A3J2#1-208

PO6019#1-208

A2J2#1-208
POIF1#1-40 POCO#1-14

PO6017#1-120

POJ2#1-120
P0J7#1-50 P0J2G#1-
P0J4#1-7 P0J3G#1-7

M7500 POCB1#1-3 POIF#1-40 PODM#1-13 POCO#1-14

P0J1B#1-

FMT_B PWB
MOTHER PWB P0J9#1-50
M7400 P0J2B#1-
CPU PWB P0J6#1-50
PONB#1-9 PO6008#1-9 P0J3B#1-7
P0J3#1-7
POCP#1-7 POCK#1-12 POUL#1-14 POPM#8 PO6017#5 PO6011#1-10 PO6010#1-10

IF-TIMER PWB LAMP

TIMER PWB
PON11#1-10 PON10#1-10 P0PD#1-6 P0XP#1- P0XP#1-
POCP#1-7 POCK#1-12 POCL#1-14 PO7001#13 POPF#4
P0F1#1-3 FAN
DIV PWB P0LAMP#2
P07002#1-4 FAN +HV
-
PO7003#1- FAN

TERMAL
COVERPW
B
POKX#1-2
LAN POPJ POP POP POP POP POP1
#1-2 #1-4 K#6 G#4 H#1- N #8 POKX#1-2
POF8# POF7# POPL#12 P0KM#11
3 #6 P0PY#1-4

CN51 PK SLOT SLOT S1_#2 S2_#10 P0KM#11 P0PY#1-4

#4 #6 2 #4 3 #2 S1_#2 S3_#10 THERMISTOR P0KU#1- SENOSR
S4_#2 PWB
THERMISTOR P0KS#1-
P0KA#1-3 FAN
Stand by DC @main POWER SUPPLY THERMISTOR P0KT#1-
P0KB#1-3 FAN
DC power
POPV#1-3
POPU#1-3

MV4500007A
suupply P0F2#1-3 FAN
FAN

FAN PWB C PWB

P0KV#1-3
FA FA
AC
INLET
POPU#1-3

CN34#12
POPV#1-3

POPT#1-3

CN1#1-3

IGNITER
NOIZE FILTER +HV

AC PWB + +
LAMP POWER SUPPLY + -

BREAKER KSX-1250NEVT
POPW#1-3
SW -

“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”

12-1
 BLOCK DIAGRAMS

Light

External I/O Cinema

DVI A/ B Interface
Board MOTOR Lens Mount
Image Signal Signal Receiver PWB
Data & SystemCtl Lens Drive
SDI A/ B
Processor
Mother PWB Board Fan
GPIO
Board Junction
& ExternalI/F
Signal Converter
3 Formatter
Boards Optical
GPIO GPIO PWB
2.5/3.3/5.0V
EFIB I2C Color
Signal Selector 3 DMDs Fan

3.3/5.0/12V
PRISM

RS-232 *2
& FMTCtl
LAN A/B Ethernet
ETHERPWB 3 Thermistors
Ethernet Hub
TouchPanel Fan
I2C
Option
System Opt Tube

SENSOR
12V

PWB
5V(S)

Interlock FAN PWB

Inter Lock
PWB

Thermo
Ethernet PJDIV PWB

stad
DC Power Divide
Ethernet IF-TIMER LAMP Unit
LCD Unit CPU PWB 5/5V(S)
PWB 1.2kw

TIMER
System Control

PWB
I2C
KEY PWB

Remote Control / PC Card / USB / RS-232

IGNITOR

AC 100-120/ 3.3/5/12/24V
200-240V Main
Single-phase C PWB LAMP
Power Supply
5V(S)/24V(S) Power Supply
Noise Circuit
AC Inlet AC PWB Standby
Filter Protector
Power Supply

Power
NC800C Block Diagrams “Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”

13-1
 LAMP BULB REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES AND PRECAUTIONS

NC800C Lamp Bulb Replacement Procedures and Precautions

Follow the instructions below, without fail, for NC800C replacement.
If the instructions below are not observed adequately, this may result in serious injury, burn, loss of eyesight, and
others. To avoid accidents, observe the instructions, strictly.
NEC accepts no liability for any injury caused as a result of failure in following the instructions.

– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – Replacement Procedures – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –

Prior starting the lamp replacement work, read through Items 1 and 2, without fail.

■ Preparations and precautions

1
1. Preparations
Use of protectors
After the lapse of mean usage time, the lamp is liable to generate cracks and explode due to deterioration in
the glass. When opening the lamp house or dislodging the lamp bulb, it is always necessary to wear the
protector mask, protective gloves, and thick long-sleeve clothes.
The protector mask and protective gloves are registered as the service parts. They are available by ordering
with the order numbers specified below. The thick long-sleeve clothes should be prepared by each one.
Protector mask (92339589)
Protector gloves (Kevlar gloves) (92339590)

1
2. Precautions
Transportation and storage of the lamp bulb
In the working place, lamps should be carried or stored in appropriate plastic protective cases. These cases
should be contained in an individual corrugated cardboard box. The replacement lamps are available in a
unit of every four bulbs. They come in a double-unit package. Physical distribution should be carried out in a
style of this double-unit package.

2 Replacement of the lamp bulb

WARNING!
Before turning on the lamp, close the lamp house completely, without fail. While the lamp is lit, never look at
the arcs directly in the lamp bulb.

WARNING!
The lamp house is very dangerous during operation. To avoid burn injuries, do not handle the lamp until it is
cooled down to room temperature.

WARNING!
Since the lamp bulb has a high internal pressure at all times, there is danger of explosion.
When maintenance of equipment is intended, never fail to wear a protector mask, protective gloves, and
thick long-sleeve clothes to avoid injuries and destruction of equipment. Maintenance services should be
started after the lamp house and the lamp bulb have been cooled down.

“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”

14-1
 LAMP BULB REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES AND PRECAUTIONS

Caution:
Never touch the exposed glass part of the lamp. Otherwise, lamp performance and operational life will be
reduced. If the lamp is touched by hands or contaminated, neatly wipe it with soft and clean cloth soaked with
alcohol.

Caution:
If any lamp other than the specified one is used, or if the lamp is modified without manufacturer's permission,
such a conduct will lead to serious malfunction or problems in quality and safety. Use the specified lamp and
follow the steps of replacement specified by NEC (this manual).

■ Replacement procedures
(Caution) Replacement of the lamp should be carried out after the lapse of more than 10 minutes after the lamp
has been unlit, and after confirming that the lamp and the lamp house have been cooled down
sufficiently.

(Caution) The lamp bulb and/or the lamp house may be broken as a result of falling. It may be fractured even
though it falls down from a height of 10cm.

1. In the first place, check the "Lamp Replacement Time" label. It indicates that the lamp house of the lamp bulb
being replaced has been handled for replacement within 5 times, including the case of shipment from the
factory. If the frequency of replacement is 5 times or less, go to Step 2. In the case of 6 times or more, the
operational life of the lamp house is considered to have expired. Stop the replacement of the lamp bulb.

2. Remove the screws FA (4 positions) at the four corners on the projection side of the lamp house. Take out the
front cover.

“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”

14-2
 LAMP BULB REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES AND PRECAUTIONS

3. Remove the screws R (4 positions) at the four corners on the rear cover side of the lamp house. Take out the
rear cover.

4. Remove the fixing nuts from lamp bulb anode block.

(Caution) When loosening or tightening the lamp anode fixing nut, firmly hold the anode block with an empty
hand directly. (At that time, be careful not to exert a bending or torsional force on the cooling fin or
glass block of the lamp bulb.) If you hold the opposite lamp cathode block, this may result in fracture
due to a torsional or bending force on the lamp.

(Caution) The lamp anode fixing nut should be tightened firmly by hand, without fail. Never use any tool for
tightening.

(Caution) Examine the electrical connections for the freedom from rust generation, burning, discoloration, etc.
In particular, the lamp anode fixing nut should be replaced with the new one that is attached to a new
lamp bulb.

5. Remove wire fixing screws and take out the wiring materials from the lamp anode block. At this stage, the
cooling fins of the lamp bulb become free. (Photo UP)

“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”

14-3
 LAMP BULB REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES AND PRECAUTIONS

6. Remove wire fixing screws and take out the wiring materials from the lamp cathode block.

7. Remove the lamp cathode fixing nut R. (Be careful not to exert a bending or torsional force on the glass block
of the lamp bulb.) (Photo UP)

(Caution) When loosening or tightening the lamp cathode fixing nut, firmly hold the cathode block with an
empty hand directly. If you hold the opposite lamp cathode block, this may result in fracture due to a
torsional or bending force on the lamp.

(Caution) The lamp cathode fixing nut should be tightened firmly by hand, without fail. Never use any tool for
tightening.

(Caution) Examine the electrical connections for the freedom from rust generation, burning, discoloration, etc.
In particular, the lamp cathode fixing nut should be replaced with the new one that is attached to a
new lamp bulb.

8. When removing the hexagon nut, do not grip the lamp bulb anode block. Hold the lamp bulb while the lamp
cathode block is grasped. When pulling out the lamp bulb after the removal of the hexagon nut, do not grip
the cooling fins at the lamp bulb anode block. Grasp the side pipe of the lamp bulb anode block and pull out
the lamp bulb.

But grasp the side pipe of the

lamp bulb.

“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”

14-4
 LAMP BULB REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES AND PRECAUTIONS

The base flange has a notch.

For insertion, positioning in
regard to the hold block should
be duly adjusted.

9. Take out the protection sheet by turning it reversely against the winding direction, while its one end is pulled
from the front cover side.

(Caution) The protection sheet, even after removal once before mounting, should be wound again. (If this work
is done with the protection sheet left mounted, this sheet often does not come out after the lamp bulb
has been mounted. In such a case, this mounting work may have to be done again from the begin-
ning.)

(Caution) When removing the protection sheet, make sure not to give stresses to the lamp bulb. (If it is difficult
to remove the protection sheet because of being caught by a mirror, the sheet can easily be taken out
if it is pushed from the direction of the rear cover.)

(Caution) If the reflector or the front glass seems to be contaminated before the installation of a new lamp bulb,
gently wipe it with soft and clean cloth soaked with alcohol.
At that time, peeling of the coating may be discovered on the reflection surface of the reflector. This
means the expiration of reflector life. Stop the lamp replacement work. In such a case, the lamp
house as a whole has to be replaced. The steps of 6. and thereafter should be suspended.

(Caution) When installing a new lamp bulb, pay attention to the direction of turning.

(Caution) A protection sheet is wound around the lamp bulb, intended to prevent possible damage during the
replacement, and to avoid the scattering of chips in case of rupture. The lamp installation work
should be carried out always with this protection sheet attached. After the completion of installation,
this sheet must be removed, without fail. If this protection sheet is left attached and the lamp is turned
on, the sheet will be burned, thus resulting in the generation of smoke and the occurrence of a fire in
the worst case.

(Caution) While the lamp bulb is being taken out or installed, it must be handled with care in order not to let it
contact the reflector.

(Caution) When the hexagon nut is tightened to fix the lamp cathode block, the base flange notch should be
positioned so that it meets the position of the hold block notch. In this case, grip the side pipe of the
lamp bulb without holding the cooling fin block of the bulb. (Otherwise, a bending or torsional force
may be exerted on the lamp, thus increasing the possibility of fracture.)

“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”

14-5
 LAMP BULB REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES AND PRECAUTIONS

(Caution) Confirm that the electrical connections are free from rust, burning, discoloration, and so on. In par-
ticular, the nuts for tightening the lamp's anode and cathode blocks must be replaced, without fail,
with those that have been furnished to a new lamp item.

10. Installation of a new lamp bulb can be done in the reverse sequence of procedures for removal: 9 → 8 → 7
→ 6 → 5 → 4 → 3 → 2.

11. Describe the date of lamp replacement in a relevant empty box of the "Lamp Replacement Time" label.

Label
(Replacement)

12. Put the lamp house, with the replaced lamp bulb, in the projector set. Repeat the sequence twice of 15-
minute ON and 5-minute OFF. Since then, confirm that there is no problem.

13. Disposal procedures

The used lamp bulb contains a high-pressure xenon gas, involving danger of fracture. As such, the glass
block should be broken before disposal. The disposal procedures are as follows:

1 Put the used lamp bulb in an appropriative lamp protection case, and lock the metal fittings assuredly.
2 Put the lamp protection case in a container box and stick adhesive tapes to the box carefully so that its
3 Hold the container box horizontally and let it fall down to the hard floor from a height of about one meter.
lid cannot open.

4 Try to shake the container box to confirm that the lamp bulb has been broken.
5 Dispose of it as industrial waste. In this case, however, actions have to be taken to conform to the local
regulations of each region.

“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”

14-6
 LAMP BULB REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES AND PRECAUTIONS

14. Filter change

a. Remove the side panel LR assy.

b. Remove the bracket and change the filter.

c. Remove the side panel R assy and change the filter.

“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”

14-7
01154033 (NC800C)